| 1 | \input texinfo
 | 
|---|
| 2 | @setfilename ld.info
 | 
|---|
| 3 | @c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
 | 
|---|
| 4 | @c 2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 | 
|---|
| 5 | @syncodeindex ky cp
 | 
|---|
| 6 | @include configdoc.texi
 | 
|---|
| 7 | @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
 | 
|---|
| 8 | @include ldver.texi
 | 
|---|
| 9 | 
 | 
|---|
| 10 | @c @smallbook
 | 
|---|
| 11 | 
 | 
|---|
| 12 | @macro gcctabopt{body}
 | 
|---|
| 13 | @code{\body\}
 | 
|---|
| 14 | @end macro
 | 
|---|
| 15 | 
 | 
|---|
| 16 | @c man begin NAME
 | 
|---|
| 17 | @ifset man
 | 
|---|
| 18 | @c Configure for the generation of man pages
 | 
|---|
| 19 | @set UsesEnvVars
 | 
|---|
| 20 | @set GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 21 | @set A29K
 | 
|---|
| 22 | @set ARC
 | 
|---|
| 23 | @set ARM
 | 
|---|
| 24 | @set D10V
 | 
|---|
| 25 | @set D30V
 | 
|---|
| 26 | @set H8/300
 | 
|---|
| 27 | @set H8/500
 | 
|---|
| 28 | @set HPPA
 | 
|---|
| 29 | @set I370
 | 
|---|
| 30 | @set I80386
 | 
|---|
| 31 | @set I860
 | 
|---|
| 32 | @set I960
 | 
|---|
| 33 | @set M32R
 | 
|---|
| 34 | @set M68HC11
 | 
|---|
| 35 | @set M680X0
 | 
|---|
| 36 | @set MCORE
 | 
|---|
| 37 | @set MIPS
 | 
|---|
| 38 | @set MMIX
 | 
|---|
| 39 | @set MSP430
 | 
|---|
| 40 | @set PDP11
 | 
|---|
| 41 | @set PJ
 | 
|---|
| 42 | @set SH
 | 
|---|
| 43 | @set SPARC
 | 
|---|
| 44 | @set TIC54X
 | 
|---|
| 45 | @set V850
 | 
|---|
| 46 | @set VAX
 | 
|---|
| 47 | @set WIN32
 | 
|---|
| 48 | @set XTENSA
 | 
|---|
| 49 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 50 | @c man end
 | 
|---|
| 51 | 
 | 
|---|
| 52 | @ifinfo
 | 
|---|
| 53 | @format
 | 
|---|
| 54 | START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
 | 
|---|
| 55 | * Ld: (ld).                       The GNU linker.
 | 
|---|
| 56 | END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
 | 
|---|
| 57 | @end format
 | 
|---|
| 58 | @end ifinfo
 | 
|---|
| 59 | 
 | 
|---|
| 60 | @ifinfo
 | 
|---|
| 61 | This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD version @value{VERSION}.
 | 
|---|
| 62 | 
 | 
|---|
| 63 | Copyright (C) 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
 | 
|---|
| 64 | 2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 | 
|---|
| 65 | 
 | 
|---|
| 66 | @ignore
 | 
|---|
| 67 | 
 | 
|---|
| 68 | Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
 | 
|---|
| 69 | under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
 | 
|---|
| 70 | or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
 | 
|---|
| 71 | with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
 | 
|---|
| 72 | Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
 | 
|---|
| 73 | section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
 | 
|---|
| 74 | 
 | 
|---|
| 75 | Permission is granted to process this file through Tex and print the
 | 
|---|
| 76 | results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
 | 
|---|
| 77 | notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
 | 
|---|
| 78 | (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
 | 
|---|
| 79 | 
 | 
|---|
| 80 | @end ignore
 | 
|---|
| 81 | @end ifinfo
 | 
|---|
| 82 | @iftex
 | 
|---|
| 83 | @finalout
 | 
|---|
| 84 | @setchapternewpage odd
 | 
|---|
| 85 | @settitle Using LD, the GNU linker
 | 
|---|
| 86 | @titlepage
 | 
|---|
| 87 | @title Using ld
 | 
|---|
| 88 | @subtitle The GNU linker
 | 
|---|
| 89 | @sp 1
 | 
|---|
| 90 | @subtitle @code{ld} version 2
 | 
|---|
| 91 | @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
 | 
|---|
| 92 | @author Steve Chamberlain
 | 
|---|
| 93 | @author Ian Lance Taylor
 | 
|---|
| 94 | @page
 | 
|---|
| 95 | 
 | 
|---|
| 96 | @tex
 | 
|---|
| 97 | {\parskip=0pt
 | 
|---|
| 98 | \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
 | 
|---|
| 99 | \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
 | 
|---|
| 100 | \hfill {\it Using LD, the GNU linker}\par
 | 
|---|
| 101 | \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
 | 
|---|
| 102 | }
 | 
|---|
| 103 | \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
 | 
|---|
| 104 | @end tex
 | 
|---|
| 105 | 
 | 
|---|
| 106 | @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
 | 
|---|
| 107 | @c man begin COPYRIGHT
 | 
|---|
| 108 | Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
 | 
|---|
| 109 | 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 | 
|---|
| 110 | 
 | 
|---|
| 111 | Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
 | 
|---|
| 112 | under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
 | 
|---|
| 113 | or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
 | 
|---|
| 114 | with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
 | 
|---|
| 115 | Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
 | 
|---|
| 116 | section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
 | 
|---|
| 117 | @c man end
 | 
|---|
| 118 | 
 | 
|---|
| 119 | @end titlepage
 | 
|---|
| 120 | @end iftex
 | 
|---|
| 121 | @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
 | 
|---|
| 122 | 
 | 
|---|
| 123 | @ifnottex
 | 
|---|
| 124 | @node Top
 | 
|---|
| 125 | @top Using ld
 | 
|---|
| 126 | This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld version @value{VERSION}.
 | 
|---|
| 127 | 
 | 
|---|
| 128 | This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
 | 
|---|
| 129 | Documentation License.  A copy of the license is included in the
 | 
|---|
| 130 | section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
 | 
|---|
| 131 | 
 | 
|---|
| 132 | @menu
 | 
|---|
| 133 | * Overview::                    Overview
 | 
|---|
| 134 | * Invocation::                  Invocation
 | 
|---|
| 135 | * Scripts::                     Linker Scripts
 | 
|---|
| 136 | @ifset GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 137 | * Machine Dependent::           Machine Dependent Features
 | 
|---|
| 138 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 139 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 140 | @ifset H8300
 | 
|---|
| 141 | * H8/300::                      ld and the H8/300
 | 
|---|
| 142 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 143 | @ifset Renesas
 | 
|---|
| 144 | * Renesas::                     ld and other Renesas micros
 | 
|---|
| 145 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 146 | @ifset I960
 | 
|---|
| 147 | * i960::                        ld and the Intel 960 family
 | 
|---|
| 148 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 149 | @ifset ARM
 | 
|---|
| 150 | * ARM::                         ld and the ARM family
 | 
|---|
| 151 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 152 | @ifset HPPA
 | 
|---|
| 153 | * HPPA ELF32::                  ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
 | 
|---|
| 154 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 155 | @ifset TICOFF
 | 
|---|
| 156 | * TI COFF::                     ld and the TI COFF
 | 
|---|
| 157 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 158 | @ifset WIN32
 | 
|---|
| 159 | * Win32::                       ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
 | 
|---|
| 160 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 161 | @ifset XTENSA
 | 
|---|
| 162 | * Xtensa::                      ld and Xtensa Processors
 | 
|---|
| 163 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 164 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 165 | @ifclear SingleFormat
 | 
|---|
| 166 | * BFD::                         BFD
 | 
|---|
| 167 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 168 | @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
 | 
|---|
| 169 | 
 | 
|---|
| 170 | * Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
 | 
|---|
| 171 | * MRI::                         MRI Compatible Script Files
 | 
|---|
| 172 | * GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
 | 
|---|
| 173 | * Index::                       Index
 | 
|---|
| 174 | @end menu
 | 
|---|
| 175 | @end ifnottex
 | 
|---|
| 176 | 
 | 
|---|
| 177 | @node Overview
 | 
|---|
| 178 | @chapter Overview
 | 
|---|
| 179 | 
 | 
|---|
| 180 | @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
 | 
|---|
| 181 | @cindex what is this?
 | 
|---|
| 182 | 
 | 
|---|
| 183 | @ifset man
 | 
|---|
| 184 | @c man begin SYNOPSIS
 | 
|---|
| 185 | ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 186 | @c man end
 | 
|---|
| 187 | 
 | 
|---|
| 188 | @c man begin SEEALSO
 | 
|---|
| 189 | ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
 | 
|---|
| 190 | the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
 | 
|---|
| 191 | @file{ld}.
 | 
|---|
| 192 | @c man end
 | 
|---|
| 193 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 194 | 
 | 
|---|
| 195 | @c man begin DESCRIPTION
 | 
|---|
| 196 | 
 | 
|---|
| 197 | @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
 | 
|---|
| 198 | their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
 | 
|---|
| 199 | compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
 | 
|---|
| 200 | 
 | 
|---|
| 201 | @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
 | 
|---|
| 202 | a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
 | 
|---|
| 203 | to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
 | 
|---|
| 204 | 
 | 
|---|
| 205 | @ifset man
 | 
|---|
| 206 | @c For the man only
 | 
|---|
| 207 | This man page does not describe the command language; see the 
 | 
|---|
| 208 | @command{ld} entry in @code{info}, or the manual
 | 
|---|
| 209 | ld: the GNU linker, for full details on the command language and 
 | 
|---|
| 210 | on other aspects of the GNU linker. 
 | 
|---|
| 211 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 212 | 
 | 
|---|
| 213 | @ifclear SingleFormat
 | 
|---|
| 214 | This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
 | 
|---|
| 215 | to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
 | 
|---|
| 216 | write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
 | 
|---|
| 217 | @code{a.out}.  Different formats may be linked together to produce any
 | 
|---|
| 218 | available kind of object file.  @xref{BFD}, for more information.
 | 
|---|
| 219 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 220 | 
 | 
|---|
| 221 | Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
 | 
|---|
| 222 | linkers in providing diagnostic information.  Many linkers abandon
 | 
|---|
| 223 | execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
 | 
|---|
| 224 | @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
 | 
|---|
| 225 | (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
 | 
|---|
| 226 | 
 | 
|---|
| 227 | @c man end
 | 
|---|
| 228 | 
 | 
|---|
| 229 | @node Invocation
 | 
|---|
| 230 | @chapter Invocation
 | 
|---|
| 231 | 
 | 
|---|
| 232 | @c man begin DESCRIPTION
 | 
|---|
| 233 | 
 | 
|---|
| 234 | The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
 | 
|---|
| 235 | and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers.  As a result,
 | 
|---|
| 236 | you have many choices to control its behavior.
 | 
|---|
| 237 | 
 | 
|---|
| 238 | @c man end
 | 
|---|
| 239 | 
 | 
|---|
| 240 | @ifset UsesEnvVars
 | 
|---|
| 241 | @menu
 | 
|---|
| 242 | * Options::                     Command Line Options
 | 
|---|
| 243 | * Environment::                 Environment Variables
 | 
|---|
| 244 | @end menu
 | 
|---|
| 245 | 
 | 
|---|
| 246 | @node Options
 | 
|---|
| 247 | @section Command Line Options
 | 
|---|
| 248 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 249 | 
 | 
|---|
| 250 | @cindex command line
 | 
|---|
| 251 | @cindex options
 | 
|---|
| 252 | 
 | 
|---|
| 253 | @c man begin OPTIONS
 | 
|---|
| 254 | 
 | 
|---|
| 255 | The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
 | 
|---|
| 256 | practice few of them are used in any particular context.
 | 
|---|
| 257 | @cindex standard Unix system
 | 
|---|
| 258 | For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
 | 
|---|
| 259 | object files on a standard, supported Unix system.  On such a system, to
 | 
|---|
| 260 | link a file @code{hello.o}:
 | 
|---|
| 261 | 
 | 
|---|
| 262 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 263 | ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
 | 
|---|
| 264 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 265 | 
 | 
|---|
| 266 | This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
 | 
|---|
| 267 | result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
 | 
|---|
| 268 | the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
 | 
|---|
| 269 | directories.  (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
 | 
|---|
| 270 | 
 | 
|---|
| 271 | Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
 | 
|---|
| 272 | point in the command line.  However, options which refer to files, such
 | 
|---|
| 273 | as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
 | 
|---|
| 274 | which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
 | 
|---|
| 275 | files and other file options.  Repeating non-file options with a
 | 
|---|
| 276 | different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
 | 
|---|
| 277 | occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
 | 
|---|
| 278 | option.  Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
 | 
|---|
| 279 | noted in the descriptions below.
 | 
|---|
| 280 | 
 | 
|---|
| 281 | @cindex object files
 | 
|---|
| 282 | Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
 | 
|---|
| 283 | together.  They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
 | 
|---|
| 284 | options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
 | 
|---|
| 285 | an option and its argument.
 | 
|---|
| 286 | 
 | 
|---|
| 287 | Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
 | 
|---|
| 288 | specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
 | 
|---|
| 289 | and the script command language.  If @emph{no} binary input files at all
 | 
|---|
| 290 | are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
 | 
|---|
| 291 | message @samp{No input files}.
 | 
|---|
| 292 | 
 | 
|---|
| 293 | If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
 | 
|---|
| 294 | assume that it is a linker script.  A script specified in this way
 | 
|---|
| 295 | augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
 | 
|---|
| 296 | linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}).  This feature
 | 
|---|
| 297 | permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
 | 
|---|
| 298 | or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
 | 
|---|
| 299 | @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects.  Note that
 | 
|---|
| 300 | specifying a script in this way merely augments the main linker script;
 | 
|---|
| 301 | use the @samp{-T} option to replace the default linker script entirely.
 | 
|---|
| 302 | @xref{Scripts}.
 | 
|---|
| 303 | 
 | 
|---|
| 304 | For options whose names are a single letter,
 | 
|---|
| 305 | option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
 | 
|---|
| 306 | whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
 | 
|---|
| 307 | option that requires them.
 | 
|---|
| 308 | 
 | 
|---|
| 309 | For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
 | 
|---|
| 310 | precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
 | 
|---|
| 311 | @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent.  Note---there is one exception to
 | 
|---|
| 312 | this rule.  Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
 | 
|---|
| 313 | only be preceeded by two dashes.  This is to reduce confusion with the
 | 
|---|
| 314 | @samp{-o} option.  So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
 | 
|---|
| 315 | name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
 | 
|---|
| 316 | output.
 | 
|---|
| 317 | 
 | 
|---|
| 318 | Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
 | 
|---|
| 319 | option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
 | 
|---|
| 320 | immediately following the option that requires them.  For example,
 | 
|---|
| 321 | @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
 | 
|---|
| 322 | Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
 | 
|---|
| 323 | accepted.
 | 
|---|
| 324 | 
 | 
|---|
| 325 | Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
 | 
|---|
| 326 | (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
 | 
|---|
| 327 | prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
 | 
|---|
| 328 | compiler driver) like this:
 | 
|---|
| 329 | 
 | 
|---|
| 330 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 331 |   gcc -Wl,--startgroup foo.o bar.o -Wl,--endgroup
 | 
|---|
| 332 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 333 | 
 | 
|---|
| 334 | This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
 | 
|---|
| 335 | silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.
 | 
|---|
| 336 | 
 | 
|---|
| 337 | Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
 | 
|---|
| 338 | linker:
 | 
|---|
| 339 | 
 | 
|---|
| 340 | @table @gcctabopt
 | 
|---|
| 341 | @kindex -a@var{keyword}
 | 
|---|
| 342 | @item -a@var{keyword}
 | 
|---|
| 343 | This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility.  The @var{keyword}
 | 
|---|
| 344 | argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
 | 
|---|
| 345 | @samp{default}.  @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
 | 
|---|
| 346 | @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
 | 
|---|
| 347 | to @samp{-Bdynamic}.  This option may be used any number of times.
 | 
|---|
| 348 | 
 | 
|---|
| 349 | @ifset I960
 | 
|---|
| 350 | @cindex architectures
 | 
|---|
| 351 | @kindex -A@var{arch}
 | 
|---|
| 352 | @item -A@var{architecture}
 | 
|---|
| 353 | @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
 | 
|---|
| 354 | @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
 | 
|---|
| 355 | In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
 | 
|---|
| 356 | Intel 960 family of architectures.  In that @command{ld} configuration, the
 | 
|---|
| 357 | @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
 | 
|---|
| 358 | the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
 | 
|---|
| 359 | archive-library search path.  @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
 | 
|---|
| 360 | family}, for details.
 | 
|---|
| 361 | 
 | 
|---|
| 362 | Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
 | 
|---|
| 363 | other architecture families.
 | 
|---|
| 364 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 365 | 
 | 
|---|
| 366 | @ifclear SingleFormat
 | 
|---|
| 367 | @cindex binary input format
 | 
|---|
| 368 | @kindex -b @var{format}
 | 
|---|
| 369 | @kindex --format=@var{format}
 | 
|---|
| 370 | @cindex input format
 | 
|---|
| 371 | @cindex input format
 | 
|---|
| 372 | @item -b @var{input-format}
 | 
|---|
| 373 | @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
 | 
|---|
| 374 | @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
 | 
|---|
| 375 | file.  If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
 | 
|---|
| 376 | @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
 | 
|---|
| 377 | that follow this option on the command line.  Even when @command{ld} is
 | 
|---|
| 378 | configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
 | 
|---|
| 379 | to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
 | 
|---|
| 380 | default input format the most usual format on each machine.
 | 
|---|
| 381 | @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
 | 
|---|
| 382 | supported by the BFD libraries.  (You can list the available binary
 | 
|---|
| 383 | formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
 | 
|---|
| 384 | @xref{BFD}.
 | 
|---|
| 385 | 
 | 
|---|
| 386 | You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
 | 
|---|
| 387 | binary format.  You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
 | 
|---|
| 388 | linking object files of different formats), by including
 | 
|---|
| 389 | @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
 | 
|---|
| 390 | particular format.
 | 
|---|
| 391 | 
 | 
|---|
| 392 | The default format is taken from the environment variable
 | 
|---|
| 393 | @code{GNUTARGET}.
 | 
|---|
| 394 | @ifset UsesEnvVars
 | 
|---|
| 395 | @xref{Environment}.
 | 
|---|
| 396 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 397 | You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
 | 
|---|
| 398 | @code{TARGET};
 | 
|---|
| 399 | @ifclear man
 | 
|---|
| 400 | see @ref{Format Commands}.
 | 
|---|
| 401 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 402 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 403 | 
 | 
|---|
| 404 | @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
 | 
|---|
| 405 | @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
 | 
|---|
| 406 | @cindex compatibility, MRI
 | 
|---|
| 407 | @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
 | 
|---|
| 408 | @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
 | 
|---|
| 409 | For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
 | 
|---|
| 410 | files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
 | 
|---|
| 411 | @ifclear man
 | 
|---|
| 412 | @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
 | 
|---|
| 413 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 414 | @ifset man
 | 
|---|
| 415 | the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
 | 
|---|
| 416 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 417 | Introduce MRI script files with
 | 
|---|
| 418 | the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
 | 
|---|
| 419 | scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
 | 
|---|
| 420 | If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
 | 
|---|
| 421 | specified by any @samp{-L} options.
 | 
|---|
| 422 | 
 | 
|---|
| 423 | @cindex common allocation
 | 
|---|
| 424 | @kindex -d
 | 
|---|
| 425 | @kindex -dc
 | 
|---|
| 426 | @kindex -dp
 | 
|---|
| 427 | @item -d
 | 
|---|
| 428 | @itemx -dc
 | 
|---|
| 429 | @itemx -dp
 | 
|---|
| 430 | These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
 | 
|---|
| 431 | compatibility with other linkers.  They assign space to common symbols
 | 
|---|
| 432 | even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}).  The
 | 
|---|
| 433 | script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
 | 
|---|
| 434 | @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
 | 
|---|
| 435 | 
 | 
|---|
| 436 | @cindex entry point, from command line
 | 
|---|
| 437 | @kindex -e @var{entry}
 | 
|---|
| 438 | @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
 | 
|---|
| 439 | @item -e @var{entry}
 | 
|---|
| 440 | @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
 | 
|---|
| 441 | Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
 | 
|---|
| 442 | program, rather than the default entry point.  If there is no symbol
 | 
|---|
| 443 | named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
 | 
|---|
| 444 | and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
 | 
|---|
| 445 | base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
 | 
|---|
| 446 | @samp{0} for base 8).  @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
 | 
|---|
| 447 | and other ways of specifying the entry point.
 | 
|---|
| 448 | 
 | 
|---|
| 449 | @cindex dynamic symbol table
 | 
|---|
| 450 | @kindex -E
 | 
|---|
| 451 | @kindex --export-dynamic
 | 
|---|
| 452 | @item -E
 | 
|---|
| 453 | @itemx --export-dynamic
 | 
|---|
| 454 | When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to the
 | 
|---|
| 455 | dynamic symbol table.  The dynamic symbol table is the set of symbols
 | 
|---|
| 456 | which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
 | 
|---|
| 457 | 
 | 
|---|
| 458 | If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will normally
 | 
|---|
| 459 | contain only those symbols which are referenced by some dynamic object
 | 
|---|
| 460 | mentioned in the link.
 | 
|---|
| 461 | 
 | 
|---|
| 462 | If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
 | 
|---|
| 463 | back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
 | 
|---|
| 464 | dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
 | 
|---|
| 465 | linking the program itself.
 | 
|---|
| 466 | 
 | 
|---|
| 467 | You can also use the version script to control what symbols should
 | 
|---|
| 468 | be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
 | 
|---|
| 469 | See the description of @samp{--version-script} in @ref{VERSION}.
 | 
|---|
| 470 | 
 | 
|---|
| 471 | @ifclear SingleFormat
 | 
|---|
| 472 | @cindex big-endian objects
 | 
|---|
| 473 | @cindex endianness
 | 
|---|
| 474 | @kindex -EB
 | 
|---|
| 475 | @item -EB
 | 
|---|
| 476 | Link big-endian objects.  This affects the default output format.
 | 
|---|
| 477 | 
 | 
|---|
| 478 | @cindex little-endian objects
 | 
|---|
| 479 | @kindex -EL
 | 
|---|
| 480 | @item -EL
 | 
|---|
| 481 | Link little-endian objects.  This affects the default output format.
 | 
|---|
| 482 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 483 | 
 | 
|---|
| 484 | @kindex -f
 | 
|---|
| 485 | @kindex --auxiliary
 | 
|---|
| 486 | @item -f
 | 
|---|
| 487 | @itemx --auxiliary @var{name}
 | 
|---|
| 488 | When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
 | 
|---|
| 489 | to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
 | 
|---|
| 490 | table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
 | 
|---|
| 491 | symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
 | 
|---|
| 492 | 
 | 
|---|
| 493 | If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
 | 
|---|
| 494 | run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field.  If
 | 
|---|
| 495 | the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
 | 
|---|
| 496 | first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
 | 
|---|
| 497 | @var{name}.  If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
 | 
|---|
| 498 | in the filter object.  The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
 | 
|---|
| 499 | Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
 | 
|---|
| 500 | implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
 | 
|---|
| 501 | machine specific performance.
 | 
|---|
| 502 | 
 | 
|---|
| 503 | This option may be specified more than once.  The DT_AUXILIARY entries
 | 
|---|
| 504 | will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
 | 
|---|
| 505 | 
 | 
|---|
| 506 | @kindex -F
 | 
|---|
| 507 | @kindex --filter
 | 
|---|
| 508 | @item -F @var{name}
 | 
|---|
| 509 | @itemx --filter @var{name}
 | 
|---|
| 510 | When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
 | 
|---|
| 511 | the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
 | 
|---|
| 512 | of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
 | 
|---|
| 513 | on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
 | 
|---|
| 514 | 
 | 
|---|
| 515 | If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
 | 
|---|
| 516 | run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field.  The
 | 
|---|
| 517 | dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
 | 
|---|
| 518 | filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
 | 
|---|
| 519 | found in the shared object @var{name}.  Thus the filter object can be
 | 
|---|
| 520 | used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
 | 
|---|
| 521 | @var{name}.
 | 
|---|
| 522 | 
 | 
|---|
| 523 | Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
 | 
|---|
| 524 | toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
 | 
|---|
| 525 | object files.
 | 
|---|
| 526 | @ifclear SingleFormat
 | 
|---|
| 527 | The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
 | 
|---|
| 528 | @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the 
 | 
|---|
| 529 | @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
 | 
|---|
| 530 | environment variable.
 | 
|---|
| 531 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 532 | The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
 | 
|---|
| 533 | creating an ELF shared object.
 | 
|---|
| 534 | 
 | 
|---|
| 535 | @cindex finalization function
 | 
|---|
| 536 | @kindex -fini
 | 
|---|
| 537 | @item -fini @var{name}
 | 
|---|
| 538 | When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
 | 
|---|
| 539 | executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
 | 
|---|
| 540 | address of the function.  By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
 | 
|---|
| 541 | the function to call.
 | 
|---|
| 542 | 
 | 
|---|
| 543 | @kindex -g
 | 
|---|
| 544 | @item -g
 | 
|---|
| 545 | Ignored.  Provided for compatibility with other tools.
 | 
|---|
| 546 | 
 | 
|---|
| 547 | @kindex -G
 | 
|---|
| 548 | @kindex --gpsize
 | 
|---|
| 549 | @cindex object size
 | 
|---|
| 550 | @item -G@var{value}
 | 
|---|
| 551 | @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
 | 
|---|
| 552 | Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
 | 
|---|
| 553 | @var{size}.  This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
 | 
|---|
| 554 | MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
 | 
|---|
| 555 | sections.  This is ignored for other object file formats.
 | 
|---|
| 556 | 
 | 
|---|
| 557 | @cindex runtime library name
 | 
|---|
| 558 | @kindex -h@var{name}
 | 
|---|
| 559 | @kindex -soname=@var{name}
 | 
|---|
| 560 | @item -h@var{name}
 | 
|---|
| 561 | @itemx -soname=@var{name}
 | 
|---|
| 562 | When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
 | 
|---|
| 563 | the specified name.  When an executable is linked with a shared object
 | 
|---|
| 564 | which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
 | 
|---|
| 565 | linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
 | 
|---|
| 566 | field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
 | 
|---|
| 567 | 
 | 
|---|
| 568 | @kindex -i
 | 
|---|
| 569 | @cindex incremental link
 | 
|---|
| 570 | @item -i
 | 
|---|
| 571 | Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
 | 
|---|
| 572 | 
 | 
|---|
| 573 | @cindex initialization function
 | 
|---|
| 574 | @kindex -init
 | 
|---|
| 575 | @item -init @var{name}
 | 
|---|
| 576 | When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
 | 
|---|
| 577 | executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
 | 
|---|
| 578 | of the function.  By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
 | 
|---|
| 579 | function to call.
 | 
|---|
| 580 | 
 | 
|---|
| 581 | @cindex archive files, from cmd line
 | 
|---|
| 582 | @kindex -l@var{archive}
 | 
|---|
| 583 | @kindex --library=@var{archive}
 | 
|---|
| 584 | @item -l@var{archive}
 | 
|---|
| 585 | @itemx --library=@var{archive}
 | 
|---|
| 586 | Add archive file @var{archive} to the list of files to link.  This
 | 
|---|
| 587 | option may be used any number of times.  @command{ld} will search its
 | 
|---|
| 588 | path-list for occurrences of @code{lib@var{archive}.a} for every
 | 
|---|
| 589 | @var{archive} specified.
 | 
|---|
| 590 | 
 | 
|---|
| 591 | On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
 | 
|---|
| 592 | libraries with extensions other than @code{.a}.  Specifically, on ELF
 | 
|---|
| 593 | and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library with
 | 
|---|
| 594 | an extension of @code{.so} before searching for one with an extension of
 | 
|---|
| 595 | @code{.a}.  By convention, a @code{.so} extension indicates a shared
 | 
|---|
| 596 | library.
 | 
|---|
| 597 | 
 | 
|---|
| 598 | The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
 | 
|---|
| 599 | specified on the command line.  If the archive defines a symbol which
 | 
|---|
| 600 | was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
 | 
|---|
| 601 | command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
 | 
|---|
| 602 | archive.  However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
 | 
|---|
| 603 | the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
 | 
|---|
| 604 | 
 | 
|---|
| 605 | See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
 | 
|---|
| 606 | archives multiple times.
 | 
|---|
| 607 | 
 | 
|---|
| 608 | You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
 | 
|---|
| 609 | 
 | 
|---|
| 610 | @ifset GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 611 | This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers.  However,
 | 
|---|
| 612 | if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
 | 
|---|
| 613 | behaviour of the AIX linker.
 | 
|---|
| 614 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 615 | 
 | 
|---|
| 616 | @cindex search directory, from cmd line
 | 
|---|
| 617 | @kindex -L@var{dir}
 | 
|---|
| 618 | @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
 | 
|---|
| 619 | @item -L@var{searchdir}
 | 
|---|
| 620 | @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
 | 
|---|
| 621 | Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
 | 
|---|
| 622 | for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts.  You may use this
 | 
|---|
| 623 | option any number of times.  The directories are searched in the order
 | 
|---|
| 624 | in which they are specified on the command line.  Directories specified
 | 
|---|
| 625 | on the command line are searched before the default directories.  All
 | 
|---|
| 626 | @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
 | 
|---|
| 627 | order in which the options appear.
 | 
|---|
| 628 | 
 | 
|---|
| 629 | If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
 | 
|---|
| 630 | by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
 | 
|---|
| 631 | 
 | 
|---|
| 632 | @ifset UsesEnvVars
 | 
|---|
| 633 | The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
 | 
|---|
| 634 | @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
 | 
|---|
| 635 | some cases also on how it was configured.  @xref{Environment}.
 | 
|---|
| 636 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 637 | 
 | 
|---|
| 638 | The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
 | 
|---|
| 639 | @code{SEARCH_DIR} command.  Directories specified this way are searched
 | 
|---|
| 640 | at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
 | 
|---|
| 641 | 
 | 
|---|
| 642 | @cindex emulation
 | 
|---|
| 643 | @kindex -m @var{emulation}
 | 
|---|
| 644 | @item -m@var{emulation}
 | 
|---|
| 645 | Emulate the @var{emulation} linker.  You can list the available
 | 
|---|
| 646 | emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
 | 
|---|
| 647 | 
 | 
|---|
| 648 | If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
 | 
|---|
| 649 | @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
 | 
|---|
| 650 | 
 | 
|---|
| 651 | Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
 | 
|---|
| 652 | configured.
 | 
|---|
| 653 | 
 | 
|---|
| 654 | @cindex link map
 | 
|---|
| 655 | @kindex -M
 | 
|---|
| 656 | @kindex --print-map
 | 
|---|
| 657 | @item -M
 | 
|---|
| 658 | @itemx --print-map
 | 
|---|
| 659 | Print a link map to the standard output.  A link map provides
 | 
|---|
| 660 | information about the link, including the following:
 | 
|---|
| 661 | 
 | 
|---|
| 662 | @itemize @bullet
 | 
|---|
| 663 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 664 | Where object files and symbols are mapped into memory.
 | 
|---|
| 665 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 666 | How common symbols are allocated.
 | 
|---|
| 667 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 668 | All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
 | 
|---|
| 669 | which caused the archive member to be brought in.
 | 
|---|
| 670 | @end itemize
 | 
|---|
| 671 | 
 | 
|---|
| 672 | @kindex -n
 | 
|---|
| 673 | @cindex read-only text
 | 
|---|
| 674 | @cindex NMAGIC
 | 
|---|
| 675 | @kindex --nmagic
 | 
|---|
| 676 | @item -n
 | 
|---|
| 677 | @itemx --nmagic
 | 
|---|
| 678 | Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
 | 
|---|
| 679 | @code{NMAGIC} if possible.
 | 
|---|
| 680 | 
 | 
|---|
| 681 | @kindex -N
 | 
|---|
| 682 | @kindex --omagic
 | 
|---|
| 683 | @cindex read/write from cmd line
 | 
|---|
| 684 | @cindex OMAGIC
 | 
|---|
| 685 | @item -N
 | 
|---|
| 686 | @itemx --omagic
 | 
|---|
| 687 | Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable.  Also, do
 | 
|---|
| 688 | not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
 | 
|---|
| 689 | libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
 | 
|---|
| 690 | mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}.
 | 
|---|
| 691 | 
 | 
|---|
| 692 | @kindex --no-omagic
 | 
|---|
| 693 | @cindex OMAGIC
 | 
|---|
| 694 | @item --no-omagic
 | 
|---|
| 695 | This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option.  It
 | 
|---|
| 696 | sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
 | 
|---|
| 697 | be page-aligned.  Note - this option does not enable linking against
 | 
|---|
| 698 | shared libraries.  Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
 | 
|---|
| 699 | 
 | 
|---|
| 700 | @kindex -o @var{output}
 | 
|---|
| 701 | @kindex --output=@var{output}
 | 
|---|
| 702 | @cindex naming the output file
 | 
|---|
| 703 | @item -o @var{output}
 | 
|---|
| 704 | @itemx --output=@var{output}
 | 
|---|
| 705 | Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
 | 
|---|
| 706 | option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default.  The
 | 
|---|
| 707 | script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
 | 
|---|
| 708 | 
 | 
|---|
| 709 | @kindex -O @var{level}
 | 
|---|
| 710 | @cindex generating optimized output
 | 
|---|
| 711 | @item -O @var{level}
 | 
|---|
| 712 | If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
 | 
|---|
| 713 | the output.  This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
 | 
|---|
| 714 | should only be enabled for the final binary.
 | 
|---|
| 715 | 
 | 
|---|
| 716 | @kindex -q
 | 
|---|
| 717 | @kindex --emit-relocs
 | 
|---|
| 718 | @cindex retain relocations in final executable
 | 
|---|
| 719 | @item -q
 | 
|---|
| 720 | @itemx --emit-relocs
 | 
|---|
| 721 | Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked exececutables.
 | 
|---|
| 722 | Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
 | 
|---|
| 723 | order to perform correct modifications of executables.  This results
 | 
|---|
| 724 | in larger executables.
 | 
|---|
| 725 | 
 | 
|---|
| 726 | This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
 | 
|---|
| 727 | 
 | 
|---|
| 728 | @cindex partial link
 | 
|---|
| 729 | @cindex relocatable output
 | 
|---|
| 730 | @kindex -r
 | 
|---|
| 731 | @kindex --relocateable
 | 
|---|
| 732 | @item -r
 | 
|---|
| 733 | @itemx --relocateable
 | 
|---|
| 734 | Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
 | 
|---|
| 735 | turn serve as input to @command{ld}.  This is often called @dfn{partial
 | 
|---|
| 736 | linking}.  As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
 | 
|---|
| 737 | magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
 | 
|---|
| 738 | @code{OMAGIC}.
 | 
|---|
| 739 | @c ; see @option{-N}.
 | 
|---|
| 740 | If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced.  When
 | 
|---|
| 741 | linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
 | 
|---|
| 742 | constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
 | 
|---|
| 743 | 
 | 
|---|
| 744 | When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
 | 
|---|
| 745 | partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
 | 
|---|
| 746 | relocations.  Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
 | 
|---|
| 747 | example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
 | 
|---|
| 748 | with input files in other formats at all.
 | 
|---|
| 749 | 
 | 
|---|
| 750 | This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
 | 
|---|
| 751 | 
 | 
|---|
| 752 | @kindex -R @var{file}
 | 
|---|
| 753 | @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
 | 
|---|
| 754 | @cindex symbol-only input
 | 
|---|
| 755 | @item -R @var{filename}
 | 
|---|
| 756 | @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
 | 
|---|
| 757 | Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
 | 
|---|
| 758 | relocate it or include it in the output.  This allows your output file
 | 
|---|
| 759 | to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
 | 
|---|
| 760 | programs.  You may use this option more than once.
 | 
|---|
| 761 | 
 | 
|---|
| 762 | For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
 | 
|---|
| 763 | followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
 | 
|---|
| 764 | the @option{-rpath} option.
 | 
|---|
| 765 | 
 | 
|---|
| 766 | @kindex -s
 | 
|---|
| 767 | @kindex --strip-all
 | 
|---|
| 768 | @cindex strip all symbols
 | 
|---|
| 769 | @item -s
 | 
|---|
| 770 | @itemx --strip-all
 | 
|---|
| 771 | Omit all symbol information from the output file.
 | 
|---|
| 772 | 
 | 
|---|
| 773 | @kindex -S
 | 
|---|
| 774 | @kindex --strip-debug
 | 
|---|
| 775 | @cindex strip debugger symbols
 | 
|---|
| 776 | @item -S
 | 
|---|
| 777 | @itemx --strip-debug
 | 
|---|
| 778 | Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
 | 
|---|
| 779 | 
 | 
|---|
| 780 | @kindex -t
 | 
|---|
| 781 | @kindex --trace
 | 
|---|
| 782 | @cindex input files, displaying
 | 
|---|
| 783 | @item -t
 | 
|---|
| 784 | @itemx --trace
 | 
|---|
| 785 | Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
 | 
|---|
| 786 | 
 | 
|---|
| 787 | @kindex -T @var{script}
 | 
|---|
| 788 | @kindex --script=@var{script}
 | 
|---|
| 789 | @cindex script files
 | 
|---|
| 790 | @item -T @var{scriptfile}
 | 
|---|
| 791 | @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
 | 
|---|
| 792 | Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script.  This script replaces
 | 
|---|
| 793 | @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
 | 
|---|
| 794 | @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
 | 
|---|
| 795 | output file.  @xref{Scripts}.  If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
 | 
|---|
| 796 | the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
 | 
|---|
| 797 | specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options.  Multiple @samp{-T}
 | 
|---|
| 798 | options accumulate.
 | 
|---|
| 799 | 
 | 
|---|
| 800 | @kindex -u @var{symbol}
 | 
|---|
| 801 | @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
 | 
|---|
| 802 | @cindex undefined symbol
 | 
|---|
| 803 | @item -u @var{symbol}
 | 
|---|
| 804 | @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
 | 
|---|
| 805 | Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
 | 
|---|
| 806 | symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
 | 
|---|
| 807 | modules from standard libraries.  @samp{-u} may be repeated with
 | 
|---|
| 808 | different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols.  This
 | 
|---|
| 809 | option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
 | 
|---|
| 810 | 
 | 
|---|
| 811 | @kindex -Ur
 | 
|---|
| 812 | @cindex constructors
 | 
|---|
| 813 | @item -Ur
 | 
|---|
| 814 | For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
 | 
|---|
| 815 | @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
 | 
|---|
| 816 | turn serve as input to @command{ld}.  When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
 | 
|---|
| 817 | @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
 | 
|---|
| 818 | It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
 | 
|---|
| 819 | with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
 | 
|---|
| 820 | be added to.  Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
 | 
|---|
| 821 | @samp{-r} for the others.
 | 
|---|
| 822 | 
 | 
|---|
| 823 | @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
 | 
|---|
| 824 | @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
 | 
|---|
| 825 | Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
 | 
|---|
| 826 | @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
 | 
|---|
| 827 | missing, for every orphan input section.  An orphan section is one not
 | 
|---|
| 828 | specifically mentioned in a linker script.  You may use this option
 | 
|---|
| 829 | multiple times on the command line;  It prevents the normal merging of
 | 
|---|
| 830 | input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
 | 
|---|
| 831 | in a linker script.
 | 
|---|
| 832 | 
 | 
|---|
| 833 | @kindex -v
 | 
|---|
| 834 | @kindex -V
 | 
|---|
| 835 | @kindex --version
 | 
|---|
| 836 | @cindex version
 | 
|---|
| 837 | @item -v
 | 
|---|
| 838 | @itemx --version
 | 
|---|
| 839 | @itemx -V
 | 
|---|
| 840 | Display the version number for @command{ld}.  The @option{-V} option also
 | 
|---|
| 841 | lists the supported emulations.
 | 
|---|
| 842 | 
 | 
|---|
| 843 | @kindex -x
 | 
|---|
| 844 | @kindex --discard-all
 | 
|---|
| 845 | @cindex deleting local symbols
 | 
|---|
| 846 | @item -x
 | 
|---|
| 847 | @itemx --discard-all
 | 
|---|
| 848 | Delete all local symbols.
 | 
|---|
| 849 | 
 | 
|---|
| 850 | @kindex -X
 | 
|---|
| 851 | @kindex --discard-locals
 | 
|---|
| 852 | @cindex local symbols, deleting
 | 
|---|
| 853 | @cindex L, deleting symbols beginning
 | 
|---|
| 854 | @item -X
 | 
|---|
| 855 | @itemx --discard-locals
 | 
|---|
| 856 | Delete all temporary local symbols.  For most targets, this is all local
 | 
|---|
| 857 | symbols whose names begin with @samp{L}.
 | 
|---|
| 858 | 
 | 
|---|
| 859 | @kindex -y @var{symbol}
 | 
|---|
| 860 | @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
 | 
|---|
| 861 | @cindex symbol tracing
 | 
|---|
| 862 | @item -y @var{symbol}
 | 
|---|
| 863 | @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
 | 
|---|
| 864 | Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears.  This
 | 
|---|
| 865 | option may be given any number of times.  On many systems it is necessary
 | 
|---|
| 866 | to prepend an underscore.
 | 
|---|
| 867 | 
 | 
|---|
| 868 | This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
 | 
|---|
| 869 | don't know where the reference is coming from.
 | 
|---|
| 870 | 
 | 
|---|
| 871 | @kindex -Y @var{path}
 | 
|---|
| 872 | @item -Y @var{path}
 | 
|---|
| 873 | Add @var{path} to the default library search path.  This option exists
 | 
|---|
| 874 | for Solaris compatibility.
 | 
|---|
| 875 | 
 | 
|---|
| 876 | @kindex -z @var{keyword}
 | 
|---|
| 877 | @item -z @var{keyword}
 | 
|---|
| 878 | The recognized keywords are @code{initfirst}, @code{interpose},
 | 
|---|
| 879 | @code{loadfltr}, @code{nodefaultlib}, @code{nodelete}, @code{nodlopen},
 | 
|---|
| 880 | @code{nodump}, @code{now}, @code{origin}, @code{combreloc}, @code{nocombreloc} 
 | 
|---|
| 881 | and @code{nocopyreloc}.
 | 
|---|
| 882 | The other keywords are
 | 
|---|
| 883 | ignored for Solaris compatibility. @code{initfirst} marks the object
 | 
|---|
| 884 | to be initialized first at runtime before any other objects.
 | 
|---|
| 885 | @code{interpose} marks the object that its symbol table interposes
 | 
|---|
| 886 | before all symbols but the primary executable. @code{loadfltr} marks
 | 
|---|
| 887 | the object that its filtees be processed immediately at runtime.
 | 
|---|
| 888 | @code{nodefaultlib} marks the object that the search for dependencies
 | 
|---|
| 889 | of this object will ignore any default library search paths.
 | 
|---|
| 890 | @code{nodelete} marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
 | 
|---|
| 891 | @code{nodlopen} marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
 | 
|---|
| 892 | @code{nodump} marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
 | 
|---|
| 893 | @code{now} marks the object with the non-lazy runtime binding.
 | 
|---|
| 894 | @code{origin} marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
 | 
|---|
| 895 | @code{defs} disallows undefined symbols.
 | 
|---|
| 896 | @code{muldefs} allows multiple definitions.
 | 
|---|
| 897 | @code{combreloc} combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them
 | 
|---|
| 898 | to make dynamic symbol lookup caching possible.
 | 
|---|
| 899 | @code{nocombreloc} disables multiple reloc sections combining.
 | 
|---|
| 900 | @code{nocopyreloc} disables production of copy relocs.
 | 
|---|
| 901 | 
 | 
|---|
| 902 | @kindex -(
 | 
|---|
| 903 | @cindex groups of archives
 | 
|---|
| 904 | @item -( @var{archives} -)
 | 
|---|
| 905 | @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
 | 
|---|
| 906 | The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files.  They may be
 | 
|---|
| 907 | either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
 | 
|---|
| 908 | 
 | 
|---|
| 909 | The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
 | 
|---|
| 910 | references are created.  Normally, an archive is searched only once in
 | 
|---|
| 911 | the order that it is specified on the command line.  If a symbol in that
 | 
|---|
| 912 | archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
 | 
|---|
| 913 | object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
 | 
|---|
| 914 | would not be able to resolve that reference.  By grouping the archives,
 | 
|---|
| 915 | they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
 | 
|---|
| 916 | resolved.
 | 
|---|
| 917 | 
 | 
|---|
| 918 | Using this option has a significant performance cost.  It is best to use
 | 
|---|
| 919 | it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
 | 
|---|
| 920 | more archives.
 | 
|---|
| 921 | 
 | 
|---|
| 922 | @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
 | 
|---|
| 923 | @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
 | 
|---|
| 924 | @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
 | 
|---|
| 925 | @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
 | 
|---|
| 926 | Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
 | 
|---|
| 927 | recognised.  The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
 | 
|---|
| 928 | and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files.  This was
 | 
|---|
| 929 | the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14.  The default
 | 
|---|
| 930 | behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
 | 
|---|
| 931 | so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
 | 
|---|
| 932 | restore the old behaviour.
 | 
|---|
| 933 | 
 | 
|---|
| 934 | @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
 | 
|---|
| 935 | @item -assert @var{keyword}
 | 
|---|
| 936 | This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
 | 
|---|
| 937 | 
 | 
|---|
| 938 | @kindex -Bdynamic
 | 
|---|
| 939 | @kindex -dy
 | 
|---|
| 940 | @kindex -call_shared
 | 
|---|
| 941 | @item -Bdynamic
 | 
|---|
| 942 | @itemx -dy
 | 
|---|
| 943 | @itemx -call_shared
 | 
|---|
| 944 | Link against dynamic libraries.  This is only meaningful on platforms
 | 
|---|
| 945 | for which shared libraries are supported.  This option is normally the
 | 
|---|
| 946 | default on such platforms.  The different variants of this option are
 | 
|---|
| 947 | for compatibility with various systems.  You may use this option
 | 
|---|
| 948 | multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
 | 
|---|
| 949 | @option{-l} options which follow it.
 | 
|---|
| 950 | 
 | 
|---|
| 951 | @kindex -Bgroup
 | 
|---|
| 952 | @item -Bgroup
 | 
|---|
| 953 | Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
 | 
|---|
| 954 | section.  This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
 | 
|---|
| 955 | object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
 | 
|---|
| 956 | @option{--no-undefined} is implied.  This option is only meaningful on ELF
 | 
|---|
| 957 | platforms which support shared libraries.
 | 
|---|
| 958 | 
 | 
|---|
| 959 | @kindex -Bstatic
 | 
|---|
| 960 | @kindex -dn
 | 
|---|
| 961 | @kindex -non_shared
 | 
|---|
| 962 | @kindex -static
 | 
|---|
| 963 | @item -Bstatic
 | 
|---|
| 964 | @itemx -dn
 | 
|---|
| 965 | @itemx -non_shared
 | 
|---|
| 966 | @itemx -static
 | 
|---|
| 967 | Do not link against shared libraries.  This is only meaningful on
 | 
|---|
| 968 | platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  The different
 | 
|---|
| 969 | variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems.  You
 | 
|---|
| 970 | may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
 | 
|---|
| 971 | library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it.
 | 
|---|
| 972 | 
 | 
|---|
| 973 | @kindex -Bsymbolic
 | 
|---|
| 974 | @item -Bsymbolic
 | 
|---|
| 975 | When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
 | 
|---|
| 976 | definition within the shared library, if any.  Normally, it is possible
 | 
|---|
| 977 | for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
 | 
|---|
| 978 | within the shared library.  This option is only meaningful on ELF
 | 
|---|
| 979 | platforms which support shared libraries.
 | 
|---|
| 980 | 
 | 
|---|
| 981 | @kindex --check-sections
 | 
|---|
| 982 | @kindex --no-check-sections
 | 
|---|
| 983 | @item --check-sections
 | 
|---|
| 984 | @itemx --no-check-sections
 | 
|---|
| 985 | Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
 | 
|---|
| 986 | been assigned to see if there any overlaps.  Normally the linker will
 | 
|---|
| 987 | perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
 | 
|---|
| 988 | suitable error messages.  The linker does know about, and does make
 | 
|---|
| 989 | allowances for sections in overlays.  The default behaviour can be
 | 
|---|
| 990 | restored by using the command line switch @samp{--check-sections}.
 | 
|---|
| 991 | 
 | 
|---|
| 992 | @cindex cross reference table
 | 
|---|
| 993 | @kindex --cref
 | 
|---|
| 994 | @item --cref
 | 
|---|
| 995 | Output a cross reference table.  If a linker map file is being
 | 
|---|
| 996 | generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
 | 
|---|
| 997 | Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
 | 
|---|
| 998 | 
 | 
|---|
| 999 | The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
 | 
|---|
| 1000 | easily processed by a script if necessary.  The symbols are printed out,
 | 
|---|
| 1001 | sorted by name.  For each symbol, a list of file names is given.  If the
 | 
|---|
| 1002 | symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
 | 
|---|
| 1003 | definition.  The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
 | 
|---|
| 1004 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1005 | @cindex common allocation
 | 
|---|
| 1006 | @kindex --no-define-common
 | 
|---|
| 1007 | @item --no-define-common
 | 
|---|
| 1008 | This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
 | 
|---|
| 1009 | The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
 | 
|---|
| 1010 | @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
 | 
|---|
| 1011 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1012 | The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
 | 
|---|
| 1013 | the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
 | 
|---|
| 1014 | of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
 | 
|---|
| 1015 | forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
 | 
|---|
| 1016 | Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
 | 
|---|
| 1017 | from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
 | 
|---|
| 1018 | This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
 | 
|---|
| 1019 | and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
 | 
|---|
| 1020 | duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
 | 
|---|
| 1021 | paths for runtime symbol resolution.
 | 
|---|
| 1022 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1023 | @cindex symbols, from command line
 | 
|---|
| 1024 | @kindex --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{exp}
 | 
|---|
| 1025 | @item --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{expression}
 | 
|---|
| 1026 | Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
 | 
|---|
| 1027 | address given by @var{expression}.  You may use this option as many
 | 
|---|
| 1028 | times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line.  A
 | 
|---|
| 1029 | limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
 | 
|---|
| 1030 | context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
 | 
|---|
| 1031 | symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
 | 
|---|
| 1032 | constants or symbols.  If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
 | 
|---|
| 1033 | using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
 | 
|---|
| 1034 | Assignment: Symbol Definitions}).  @emph{Note:} there should be no white
 | 
|---|
| 1035 | space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
 | 
|---|
| 1036 | @var{expression}.
 | 
|---|
| 1037 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1038 | @cindex demangling, from command line
 | 
|---|
| 1039 | @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
 | 
|---|
| 1040 | @kindex --no-demangle
 | 
|---|
| 1041 | @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
 | 
|---|
| 1042 | @itemx --no-demangle
 | 
|---|
| 1043 | These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
 | 
|---|
| 1044 | and other output.  When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
 | 
|---|
| 1045 | present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
 | 
|---|
| 1046 | underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
 | 
|---|
| 1047 | mangled symbol names into user readable names.  Different compilers have
 | 
|---|
| 1048 | different mangling styles.  The optional demangling style argument can be used
 | 
|---|
| 1049 | to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler.  The linker will
 | 
|---|
| 1050 | demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
 | 
|---|
| 1051 | is set.  These options may be used to override the default.
 | 
|---|
| 1052 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1053 | @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
 | 
|---|
| 1054 | @kindex -I@var{file}
 | 
|---|
| 1055 | @kindex --dynamic-linker @var{file}
 | 
|---|
| 1056 | @item --dynamic-linker @var{file}
 | 
|---|
| 1057 | Set the name of the dynamic linker.  This is only meaningful when
 | 
|---|
| 1058 | generating dynamically linked ELF executables.  The default dynamic
 | 
|---|
| 1059 | linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
 | 
|---|
| 1060 | doing.
 | 
|---|
| 1061 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1062 | @cindex MIPS embedded PIC code
 | 
|---|
| 1063 | @kindex --embedded-relocs
 | 
|---|
| 1064 | @item --embedded-relocs
 | 
|---|
| 1065 | This option is only meaningful when linking MIPS embedded PIC code,
 | 
|---|
| 1066 | generated by the -membedded-pic option to the @sc{gnu} compiler and
 | 
|---|
| 1067 | assembler.  It causes the linker to create a table which may be used at
 | 
|---|
| 1068 | runtime to relocate any data which was statically initialized to pointer
 | 
|---|
| 1069 | values.  See the code in testsuite/ld-empic for details.
 | 
|---|
| 1070 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1071 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1072 | @kindex --fatal-warnings
 | 
|---|
| 1073 | @item --fatal-warnings
 | 
|---|
| 1074 | Treat all warnings as errors.
 | 
|---|
| 1075 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1076 | @kindex --force-exe-suffix
 | 
|---|
| 1077 | @item  --force-exe-suffix
 | 
|---|
| 1078 | Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
 | 
|---|
| 1079 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1080 | If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
 | 
|---|
| 1081 | @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
 | 
|---|
| 1082 | the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
 | 
|---|
| 1083 | option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
 | 
|---|
| 1084 | Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
 | 
|---|
| 1085 | it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
 | 
|---|
| 1086 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1087 | @kindex --gc-sections
 | 
|---|
| 1088 | @kindex --no-gc-sections
 | 
|---|
| 1089 | @cindex garbage collection
 | 
|---|
| 1090 | @item --no-gc-sections
 | 
|---|
| 1091 | @itemx --gc-sections
 | 
|---|
| 1092 | Enable garbage collection of unused input sections.  It is ignored on
 | 
|---|
| 1093 | targets that do not support this option.  This option is not compatible
 | 
|---|
| 1094 | with @samp{-r}, nor should it be used with dynamic linking.  The default
 | 
|---|
| 1095 | behaviour (of not performing this garbage collection) can be restored by
 | 
|---|
| 1096 | specifying @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
 | 
|---|
| 1097 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1098 | @cindex help
 | 
|---|
| 1099 | @cindex usage
 | 
|---|
| 1100 | @kindex --help
 | 
|---|
| 1101 | @item --help
 | 
|---|
| 1102 | Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
 | 
|---|
| 1103 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1104 | @kindex --target-help
 | 
|---|
| 1105 | @item --target-help
 | 
|---|
| 1106 | Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
 | 
|---|
| 1107 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1108 | @kindex -Map
 | 
|---|
| 1109 | @item -Map @var{mapfile}
 | 
|---|
| 1110 | Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}.  See the description of the
 | 
|---|
| 1111 | @samp{-M} option, above.
 | 
|---|
| 1112 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1113 | @cindex memory usage
 | 
|---|
| 1114 | @kindex --no-keep-memory
 | 
|---|
| 1115 | @item --no-keep-memory
 | 
|---|
| 1116 | @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
 | 
|---|
| 1117 | symbol tables of input files in memory.  This option tells @command{ld} to
 | 
|---|
| 1118 | instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
 | 
|---|
| 1119 | necessary.  This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
 | 
|---|
| 1120 | while linking a large executable.
 | 
|---|
| 1121 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1122 | @kindex --no-undefined
 | 
|---|
| 1123 | @kindex -z defs
 | 
|---|
| 1124 | @item --no-undefined
 | 
|---|
| 1125 | @itemx -z defs
 | 
|---|
| 1126 | Normally when creating a non-symbolic shared library, undefined symbols
 | 
|---|
| 1127 | are allowed and left to be resolved by the runtime loader.  This option
 | 
|---|
| 1128 | disallows such undefined symbols if they come from regular object
 | 
|---|
| 1129 | files.  The switch @samp{--no-allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
 | 
|---|
| 1130 | behaviour for shared objects being linked into the shared library.
 | 
|---|
| 1131 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1132 | @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
 | 
|---|
| 1133 | @kindex -z muldefs
 | 
|---|
| 1134 | @item --allow-multiple-definition
 | 
|---|
| 1135 | @itemx -z muldefs
 | 
|---|
| 1136 | Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
 | 
|---|
| 1137 | report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
 | 
|---|
| 1138 | first definition will be used.
 | 
|---|
| 1139 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1140 | @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
 | 
|---|
| 1141 | @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
 | 
|---|
| 1142 | @item --allow-shlib-undefined
 | 
|---|
| 1143 | @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
 | 
|---|
| 1144 | Allow (the default) or disallow undefined symbols in shared objects.
 | 
|---|
| 1145 | The setting of this switch overrides @samp{--no-undefined} where
 | 
|---|
| 1146 | shared objects are concerned.  Thus if @samp{--no-undefined} is set
 | 
|---|
| 1147 | but @samp{--no-allow-shlib-undefined} is not, the net result will be
 | 
|---|
| 1148 | that undefined symbols in regular object files will trigger an error,
 | 
|---|
| 1149 | but undefined symbols in shared objects will be ignored.
 | 
|---|
| 1150 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1151 | The reason that @samp{--allow-shlib-undefined} is the default is that
 | 
|---|
| 1152 | the shared object being specified at link time may not be the same one
 | 
|---|
| 1153 | that is available at load time, so the symbols might actually be
 | 
|---|
| 1154 | resolvable at load time.  Plus there are some systems, (eg BeOS) where
 | 
|---|
| 1155 | undefined symbols in shared libraries is normal since the kernel
 | 
|---|
| 1156 | patches them at load time to select which function is most appropriate
 | 
|---|
| 1157 | for the current architecture. eg. to dynamically select an appropriate
 | 
|---|
| 1158 | memset function.  Apparently it is also normal for HPPA shared
 | 
|---|
| 1159 | libraries to have undefined symbols.
 | 
|---|
| 1160 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1161 | @kindex --no-undefined-version
 | 
|---|
| 1162 | @item --no-undefined-version
 | 
|---|
| 1163 | Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
 | 
|---|
| 1164 | it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
 | 
|---|
| 1165 | will be issued instead.
 | 
|---|
| 1166 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1167 | @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
 | 
|---|
| 1168 | @item --no-warn-mismatch
 | 
|---|
| 1169 | Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
 | 
|---|
| 1170 | files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
 | 
|---|
| 1171 | been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
 | 
|---|
| 1172 | This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
 | 
|---|
| 1173 | errors.  This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
 | 
|---|
| 1174 | have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
 | 
|---|
| 1175 | inappropriate.
 | 
|---|
| 1176 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1177 | @kindex --no-whole-archive
 | 
|---|
| 1178 | @item --no-whole-archive
 | 
|---|
| 1179 | Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
 | 
|---|
| 1180 | archive files.
 | 
|---|
| 1181 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1182 | @cindex output file after errors
 | 
|---|
| 1183 | @kindex --noinhibit-exec
 | 
|---|
| 1184 | @item --noinhibit-exec
 | 
|---|
| 1185 | Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
 | 
|---|
| 1186 | Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
 | 
|---|
| 1187 | errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
 | 
|---|
| 1188 | when it issues any error whatsoever.
 | 
|---|
| 1189 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1190 | @kindex -nostdlib
 | 
|---|
| 1191 | @item -nostdlib
 | 
|---|
| 1192 | Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
 | 
|---|
| 1193 | command line.  Library directories specified in linker scripts
 | 
|---|
| 1194 | (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
 | 
|---|
| 1195 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1196 | @ifclear SingleFormat
 | 
|---|
| 1197 | @kindex --oformat
 | 
|---|
| 1198 | @item --oformat @var{output-format}
 | 
|---|
| 1199 | @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
 | 
|---|
| 1200 | file.  If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
 | 
|---|
| 1201 | @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
 | 
|---|
| 1202 | object file.  Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
 | 
|---|
| 1203 | object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
 | 
|---|
| 1204 | should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
 | 
|---|
| 1205 | usual format on each machine.  @var{output-format} is a text string, the
 | 
|---|
| 1206 | name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You can
 | 
|---|
| 1207 | list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)  The script
 | 
|---|
| 1208 | command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
 | 
|---|
| 1209 | this option overrides it.  @xref{BFD}.
 | 
|---|
| 1210 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 1211 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1212 | @kindex -qmagic
 | 
|---|
| 1213 | @item -qmagic
 | 
|---|
| 1214 | This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
 | 
|---|
| 1215 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1216 | @kindex -Qy
 | 
|---|
| 1217 | @item -Qy
 | 
|---|
| 1218 | This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
 | 
|---|
| 1219 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1220 | @kindex --relax
 | 
|---|
| 1221 | @cindex synthesizing linker
 | 
|---|
| 1222 | @cindex relaxing addressing modes
 | 
|---|
| 1223 | @item --relax
 | 
|---|
| 1224 | An option with machine dependent effects.
 | 
|---|
| 1225 | @ifset GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 1226 | This option is only supported on a few targets.
 | 
|---|
| 1227 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 1228 | @ifset H8300
 | 
|---|
| 1229 | @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
 | 
|---|
| 1230 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 1231 | @ifset I960
 | 
|---|
| 1232 | @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
 | 
|---|
| 1233 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 1234 | @ifset XTENSA
 | 
|---|
| 1235 | @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
 | 
|---|
| 1236 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 1237 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1238 | On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
 | 
|---|
| 1239 | optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
 | 
|---|
| 1240 | in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
 | 
|---|
| 1241 | instructions in the output object file.
 | 
|---|
| 1242 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1243 | On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
 | 
|---|
| 1244 | debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
 | 
|---|
| 1245 | @ifset GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 1246 | This is known to be
 | 
|---|
| 1247 | the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
 | 
|---|
| 1248 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 1249 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1250 | @ifset GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 1251 | On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
 | 
|---|
| 1252 | but ignored.
 | 
|---|
| 1253 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 1254 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1255 | @cindex retaining specified symbols
 | 
|---|
| 1256 | @cindex stripping all but some symbols
 | 
|---|
| 1257 | @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
 | 
|---|
| 1258 | @item --retain-symbols-file @var{filename}
 | 
|---|
| 1259 | Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
 | 
|---|
| 1260 | discarding all others.  @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
 | 
|---|
| 1261 | symbol name per line.  This option is especially useful in environments
 | 
|---|
| 1262 | @ifset GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 1263 | (such as VxWorks)
 | 
|---|
| 1264 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 1265 | where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
 | 
|---|
| 1266 | run-time memory.
 | 
|---|
| 1267 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1268 | @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
 | 
|---|
| 1269 | or symbols needed for relocations.
 | 
|---|
| 1270 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1271 | You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
 | 
|---|
| 1272 | line.  It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
 | 
|---|
| 1273 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1274 | @ifset GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 1275 | @item -rpath @var{dir}
 | 
|---|
| 1276 | @cindex runtime library search path
 | 
|---|
| 1277 | @kindex -rpath
 | 
|---|
| 1278 | Add a directory to the runtime library search path.  This is used when
 | 
|---|
| 1279 | linking an ELF executable with shared objects.  All @option{-rpath}
 | 
|---|
| 1280 | arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
 | 
|---|
| 1281 | them to locate shared objects at runtime.  The @option{-rpath} option is
 | 
|---|
| 1282 | also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
 | 
|---|
| 1283 | objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
 | 
|---|
| 1284 | @option{-rpath-link} option.  If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
 | 
|---|
| 1285 | ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
 | 
|---|
| 1286 | @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
 | 
|---|
| 1287 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1288 | The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS.  By default, on
 | 
|---|
| 1289 | SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
 | 
|---|
| 1290 | @option{-L} options it is given.  If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
 | 
|---|
| 1291 | runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
 | 
|---|
| 1292 | options, ignoring the @option{-L} options.  This can be useful when using
 | 
|---|
| 1293 | gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
 | 
|---|
| 1294 | filesystems.
 | 
|---|
| 1295 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1296 | For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
 | 
|---|
| 1297 | followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
 | 
|---|
| 1298 | the @option{-rpath} option.
 | 
|---|
| 1299 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 1300 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1301 | @ifset GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 1302 | @cindex link-time runtime library search path
 | 
|---|
| 1303 | @kindex -rpath-link
 | 
|---|
| 1304 | @item -rpath-link @var{DIR}
 | 
|---|
| 1305 | When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another.  This
 | 
|---|
| 1306 | happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
 | 
|---|
| 1307 | of the input files.
 | 
|---|
| 1308 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1309 | When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
 | 
|---|
| 1310 | non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
 | 
|---|
| 1311 | shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
 | 
|---|
| 1312 | explicitly.  In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
 | 
|---|
| 1313 | specifies the first set of directories to search.  The
 | 
|---|
| 1314 | @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
 | 
|---|
| 1315 | either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
 | 
|---|
| 1316 | appearing multiple times.
 | 
|---|
| 1317 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1318 | This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
 | 
|---|
| 1319 | that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
 | 
|---|
| 1320 | is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
 | 
|---|
| 1321 | runtime linker would do.
 | 
|---|
| 1322 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1323 | The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
 | 
|---|
| 1324 | libraries.
 | 
|---|
| 1325 | @enumerate
 | 
|---|
| 1326 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 1327 | Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
 | 
|---|
| 1328 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 1329 | Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options.  The difference
 | 
|---|
| 1330 | between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
 | 
|---|
| 1331 | specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
 | 
|---|
| 1332 | used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
 | 
|---|
| 1333 | at link time. It is for the native linker only.
 | 
|---|
| 1334 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 1335 | On an ELF system, if the @option{-rpath} and @code{rpath-link} options
 | 
|---|
| 1336 | were not used, search the contents of the environment variable
 | 
|---|
| 1337 | @code{LD_RUN_PATH}. It is for the native linker only.
 | 
|---|
| 1338 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 1339 | On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
 | 
|---|
| 1340 | directories specified using @option{-L} options.
 | 
|---|
| 1341 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 1342 | For a native linker, the contents of the environment variable
 | 
|---|
| 1343 | @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
 | 
|---|
| 1344 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 1345 | For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
 | 
|---|
| 1346 | @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
 | 
|---|
| 1347 | libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
 | 
|---|
| 1348 | @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
 | 
|---|
| 1349 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 1350 | The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
 | 
|---|
| 1351 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 1352 | For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
 | 
|---|
| 1353 | exists, the list of directories found in that file.
 | 
|---|
| 1354 | @end enumerate
 | 
|---|
| 1355 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1356 | If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
 | 
|---|
| 1357 | warning and continue with the link.
 | 
|---|
| 1358 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 1359 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1360 | @kindex -shared
 | 
|---|
| 1361 | @kindex -Bshareable
 | 
|---|
| 1362 | @item -shared
 | 
|---|
| 1363 | @itemx -Bshareable
 | 
|---|
| 1364 | @cindex shared libraries
 | 
|---|
| 1365 | Create a shared library.  This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
 | 
|---|
| 1366 | and SunOS platforms.  On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
 | 
|---|
| 1367 | shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
 | 
|---|
| 1368 | undefined symbols in the link.
 | 
|---|
| 1369 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1370 | @item --sort-common
 | 
|---|
| 1371 | @kindex --sort-common
 | 
|---|
| 1372 | This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by size when it
 | 
|---|
| 1373 | places them in the appropriate output sections.  First come all the one
 | 
|---|
| 1374 | byte symbols, then all the two byte, then all the four byte, and then
 | 
|---|
| 1375 | everything else.  This is to prevent gaps between symbols due to
 | 
|---|
| 1376 | alignment constraints.
 | 
|---|
| 1377 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1378 | @kindex --split-by-file
 | 
|---|
| 1379 | @item --split-by-file [@var{size}]
 | 
|---|
| 1380 | Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
 | 
|---|
| 1381 | each input file when @var{size} is reached.  @var{size} defaults to a
 | 
|---|
| 1382 | size of 1 if not given.
 | 
|---|
| 1383 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1384 | @kindex --split-by-reloc
 | 
|---|
| 1385 | @item --split-by-reloc [@var{count}]
 | 
|---|
| 1386 | Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
 | 
|---|
| 1387 | output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
 | 
|---|
| 1388 | This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
 | 
|---|
| 1389 | certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
 | 
|---|
| 1390 | cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section.  Note
 | 
|---|
| 1391 | that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
 | 
|---|
| 1392 | support arbitrary sections.  The linker will not split up individual
 | 
|---|
| 1393 | input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
 | 
|---|
| 1394 | more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
 | 
|---|
| 1395 | many relocations.  @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
 | 
|---|
| 1396 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1397 | @kindex --stats
 | 
|---|
| 1398 | @item --stats
 | 
|---|
| 1399 | Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
 | 
|---|
| 1400 | as execution time and memory usage.
 | 
|---|
| 1401 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1402 | @kindex --traditional-format
 | 
|---|
| 1403 | @cindex traditional format
 | 
|---|
| 1404 | @item --traditional-format
 | 
|---|
| 1405 | For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
 | 
|---|
| 1406 | the output of some existing linker.  This switch requests @command{ld} to
 | 
|---|
| 1407 | use the traditional format instead.
 | 
|---|
| 1408 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1409 | @cindex dbx
 | 
|---|
| 1410 | For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
 | 
|---|
| 1411 | symbol string table.  This can reduce the size of an output file with
 | 
|---|
| 1412 | full debugging information by over 30 percent.  Unfortunately, the SunOS
 | 
|---|
| 1413 | @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
 | 
|---|
| 1414 | trouble).  The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
 | 
|---|
| 1415 | combine duplicate entries.
 | 
|---|
| 1416 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1417 | @kindex --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
 | 
|---|
| 1418 | @item --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
 | 
|---|
| 1419 | Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
 | 
|---|
| 1420 | address given by @var{org}.  You may use this option as many
 | 
|---|
| 1421 | times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
 | 
|---|
| 1422 | line.
 | 
|---|
| 1423 | @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
 | 
|---|
| 1424 | for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
 | 
|---|
| 1425 | @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values.  @emph{Note:} there
 | 
|---|
| 1426 | should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
 | 
|---|
| 1427 | sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
 | 
|---|
| 1428 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1429 | @kindex -Tbss @var{org}
 | 
|---|
| 1430 | @kindex -Tdata @var{org}
 | 
|---|
| 1431 | @kindex -Ttext @var{org}
 | 
|---|
| 1432 | @cindex segment origins, cmd line
 | 
|---|
| 1433 | @item -Tbss @var{org}
 | 
|---|
| 1434 | @itemx -Tdata @var{org}
 | 
|---|
| 1435 | @itemx -Ttext @var{org}
 | 
|---|
| 1436 | Same as --section-start, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
 | 
|---|
| 1437 | @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
 | 
|---|
| 1438 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1439 | @kindex --verbose
 | 
|---|
| 1440 | @cindex verbose
 | 
|---|
| 1441 | @item --dll-verbose
 | 
|---|
| 1442 | @itemx --verbose
 | 
|---|
| 1443 | Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
 | 
|---|
| 1444 | supported.  Display which input files can and cannot be opened.  Display
 | 
|---|
| 1445 | the linker script being used by the linker.
 | 
|---|
| 1446 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1447 | @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
 | 
|---|
| 1448 | @cindex version script, symbol versions
 | 
|---|
| 1449 | @itemx --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
 | 
|---|
| 1450 | Specify the name of a version script to the linker.  This is typically
 | 
|---|
| 1451 | used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
 | 
|---|
| 1452 | about the version hierarchy for the library being created.  This option
 | 
|---|
| 1453 | is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
 | 
|---|
| 1454 | @xref{VERSION}.
 | 
|---|
| 1455 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1456 | @kindex --warn-common
 | 
|---|
| 1457 | @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
 | 
|---|
| 1458 | @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
 | 
|---|
| 1459 | @item --warn-common
 | 
|---|
| 1460 | Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
 | 
|---|
| 1461 | a symbol definition.  Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
 | 
|---|
| 1462 | but linkers on some other operating systems do not.  This option allows
 | 
|---|
| 1463 | you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
 | 
|---|
| 1464 | Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
 | 
|---|
| 1465 | warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
 | 
|---|
| 1466 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1467 | There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
 | 
|---|
| 1468 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1469 | @table @samp
 | 
|---|
| 1470 | @item int i = 1;
 | 
|---|
| 1471 | A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
 | 
|---|
| 1472 | file.
 | 
|---|
| 1473 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1474 | @item extern int i;
 | 
|---|
| 1475 | An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
 | 
|---|
| 1476 | There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
 | 
|---|
| 1477 | variable somewhere.
 | 
|---|
| 1478 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1479 | @item int i;
 | 
|---|
| 1480 | A common symbol.  If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
 | 
|---|
| 1481 | variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
 | 
|---|
| 1482 | The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
 | 
|---|
| 1483 | single symbol.  If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
 | 
|---|
| 1484 | size.  The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
 | 
|---|
| 1485 | a definition of the same variable.
 | 
|---|
| 1486 | @end table
 | 
|---|
| 1487 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1488 | The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
 | 
|---|
| 1489 | Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
 | 
|---|
| 1490 | just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
 | 
|---|
| 1491 | encountered with the same name.  One or both of the two symbols will be
 | 
|---|
| 1492 | a common symbol.
 | 
|---|
| 1493 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1494 | @enumerate
 | 
|---|
| 1495 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 1496 | Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
 | 
|---|
| 1497 | definition for the symbol.
 | 
|---|
| 1498 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 1499 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
 | 
|---|
| 1500 |    overridden by definition
 | 
|---|
| 1501 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
 | 
|---|
| 1502 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 1503 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1504 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 1505 | Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
 | 
|---|
| 1506 | the symbol is encountered.  This is the same as the previous case,
 | 
|---|
| 1507 | except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
 | 
|---|
| 1508 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 1509 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
 | 
|---|
| 1510 |    overriding common
 | 
|---|
| 1511 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
 | 
|---|
| 1512 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 1513 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1514 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 1515 | Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
 | 
|---|
| 1516 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 1517 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
 | 
|---|
| 1518 |    of `@var{symbol}'
 | 
|---|
| 1519 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
 | 
|---|
| 1520 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 1521 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1522 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 1523 | Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
 | 
|---|
| 1524 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 1525 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
 | 
|---|
| 1526 |    overridden by larger common
 | 
|---|
| 1527 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
 | 
|---|
| 1528 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 1529 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1530 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 1531 | Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol.  This is
 | 
|---|
| 1532 | the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
 | 
|---|
| 1533 | encountered in a different order.
 | 
|---|
| 1534 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 1535 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
 | 
|---|
| 1536 |    overriding smaller common
 | 
|---|
| 1537 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
 | 
|---|
| 1538 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 1539 | @end enumerate
 | 
|---|
| 1540 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1541 | @kindex --warn-constructors
 | 
|---|
| 1542 | @item --warn-constructors
 | 
|---|
| 1543 | Warn if any global constructors are used.  This is only useful for a few
 | 
|---|
| 1544 | object file formats.  For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
 | 
|---|
| 1545 | detect the use of global constructors.
 | 
|---|
| 1546 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1547 | @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
 | 
|---|
| 1548 | @item --warn-multiple-gp
 | 
|---|
| 1549 | Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
 | 
|---|
| 1550 | This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
 | 
|---|
| 1551 | Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
 | 
|---|
| 1552 | section.  A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
 | 
|---|
| 1553 | of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
 | 
|---|
| 1554 | base-register relative addressing mode.  Since the offset in
 | 
|---|
| 1555 | base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
 | 
|---|
| 1556 | bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool.  Thus, in
 | 
|---|
| 1557 | large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
 | 
|---|
| 1558 | values in order to be able to address all possible constants.  This
 | 
|---|
| 1559 | option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
 | 
|---|
| 1560 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1561 | @kindex --warn-once
 | 
|---|
| 1562 | @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
 | 
|---|
| 1563 | @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
 | 
|---|
| 1564 | @item --warn-once
 | 
|---|
| 1565 | Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
 | 
|---|
| 1566 | which refers to it.
 | 
|---|
| 1567 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1568 | @kindex --warn-section-align
 | 
|---|
| 1569 | @cindex warnings, on section alignment
 | 
|---|
| 1570 | @cindex section alignment, warnings on
 | 
|---|
| 1571 | @item --warn-section-align
 | 
|---|
| 1572 | Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
 | 
|---|
| 1573 | alignment.  Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
 | 
|---|
| 1574 | The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
 | 
|---|
| 1575 | is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
 | 
|---|
| 1576 | the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
 | 
|---|
| 1577 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1578 | @kindex --whole-archive
 | 
|---|
| 1579 | @cindex including an entire archive
 | 
|---|
| 1580 | @item --whole-archive
 | 
|---|
| 1581 | For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
 | 
|---|
| 1582 | @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
 | 
|---|
| 1583 | in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
 | 
|---|
| 1584 | files.  This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
 | 
|---|
| 1585 | library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
 | 
|---|
| 1586 | library.  This option may be used more than once.
 | 
|---|
| 1587 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1588 | Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
 | 
|---|
| 1589 | about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
 | 
|---|
| 1590 | Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
 | 
|---|
| 1591 | list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
 | 
|---|
| 1592 | your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
 | 
|---|
| 1593 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1594 | @kindex --wrap
 | 
|---|
| 1595 | @item --wrap @var{symbol}
 | 
|---|
| 1596 | Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}.  Any undefined reference to
 | 
|---|
| 1597 | @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}.  Any
 | 
|---|
| 1598 | undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
 | 
|---|
| 1599 | @var{symbol}.
 | 
|---|
| 1600 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1601 | This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function.  The
 | 
|---|
| 1602 | wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}.  If it
 | 
|---|
| 1603 | wishes to call the system function, it should call
 | 
|---|
| 1604 | @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
 | 
|---|
| 1605 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1606 | Here is a trivial example:
 | 
|---|
| 1607 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1608 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 1609 | void *
 | 
|---|
| 1610 | __wrap_malloc (int c)
 | 
|---|
| 1611 | @{
 | 
|---|
| 1612 |   printf ("malloc called with %ld\n", c);
 | 
|---|
| 1613 |   return __real_malloc (c);
 | 
|---|
| 1614 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 1615 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 1616 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1617 | If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
 | 
|---|
| 1618 | all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
 | 
|---|
| 1619 | instead.  The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
 | 
|---|
| 1620 | call the real @code{malloc} function.
 | 
|---|
| 1621 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1622 | You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
 | 
|---|
| 1623 | links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed.  If you do this,
 | 
|---|
| 1624 | you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
 | 
|---|
| 1625 | file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
 | 
|---|
| 1626 | call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
 | 
|---|
| 1627 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1628 | @kindex --enable-new-dtags
 | 
|---|
| 1629 | @kindex --disable-new-dtags
 | 
|---|
| 1630 | @item --enable-new-dtags
 | 
|---|
| 1631 | @itemx --disable-new-dtags
 | 
|---|
| 1632 | This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
 | 
|---|
| 1633 | systems may not understand them. If you specify
 | 
|---|
| 1634 | @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
 | 
|---|
| 1635 | If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
 | 
|---|
| 1636 | created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
 | 
|---|
| 1637 | those options are only available for ELF systems.
 | 
|---|
| 1638 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1639 | @end table
 | 
|---|
| 1640 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1641 | @c man end
 | 
|---|
| 1642 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1643 | @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
 | 
|---|
| 1644 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1645 | @c man begin OPTIONS
 | 
|---|
| 1646 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1647 | The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
 | 
|---|
| 1648 | the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
 | 
|---|
| 1649 | normal executable.  You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
 | 
|---|
| 1650 | use this option.  In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
 | 
|---|
| 1651 | @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
 | 
|---|
| 1652 | like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
 | 
|---|
| 1653 | symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
 | 
|---|
| 1654 | object file).
 | 
|---|
| 1655 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1656 | In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
 | 
|---|
| 1657 | support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
 | 
|---|
| 1658 | PE target.  Options that take values may be separated from their
 | 
|---|
| 1659 | values by either a space or an equals sign.
 | 
|---|
| 1660 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1661 | @table @gcctabopt
 | 
|---|
| 1662 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1663 | @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
 | 
|---|
| 1664 | @item --add-stdcall-alias
 | 
|---|
| 1665 | If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
 | 
|---|
| 1666 | as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
 | 
|---|
| 1667 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1668 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1669 | @kindex --base-file
 | 
|---|
| 1670 | @item --base-file @var{file}
 | 
|---|
| 1671 | Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
 | 
|---|
| 1672 | addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
 | 
|---|
| 1673 | @file{dlltool}.
 | 
|---|
| 1674 | [This is an i386 PE specific option]
 | 
|---|
| 1675 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1676 | @kindex --dll
 | 
|---|
| 1677 | @item --dll
 | 
|---|
| 1678 | Create a DLL instead of a regular executable.  You may also use
 | 
|---|
| 1679 | @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
 | 
|---|
| 1680 | file.
 | 
|---|
| 1681 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1682 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1683 | @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
 | 
|---|
| 1684 | @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
 | 
|---|
| 1685 | @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
 | 
|---|
| 1686 | @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
 | 
|---|
| 1687 | If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
 | 
|---|
| 1688 | do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
 | 
|---|
| 1689 | only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
 | 
|---|
| 1690 | resolve that symbol by linking to the match.  For example, the
 | 
|---|
| 1691 | undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
 | 
|---|
| 1692 | @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
 | 
|---|
| 1693 | to the function @code{_bar}.  When the linker does this, it prints a
 | 
|---|
| 1694 | warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
 | 
|---|
| 1695 | import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
 | 
|---|
| 1696 | to be usable.  If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
 | 
|---|
| 1697 | feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed.  If you specify
 | 
|---|
| 1698 | @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
 | 
|---|
| 1699 | mismatches are considered to be errors.
 | 
|---|
| 1700 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1701 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1702 | @cindex DLLs, creating
 | 
|---|
| 1703 | @kindex --export-all-symbols
 | 
|---|
| 1704 | @item --export-all-symbols
 | 
|---|
| 1705 | If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
 | 
|---|
| 1706 | be exported by the DLL.  Note that this is the default if there
 | 
|---|
| 1707 | otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols.  When symbols are
 | 
|---|
| 1708 | explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
 | 
|---|
| 1709 | attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
 | 
|---|
| 1710 | option is given.  Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
 | 
|---|
| 1711 | @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and 
 | 
|---|
| 1712 | @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
 | 
|---|
| 1713 | exported.  Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be 
 | 
|---|
| 1714 | re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout 
 | 
|---|
| 1715 | such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with 
 | 
|---|
| 1716 | @code{_iname}.  In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc}, 
 | 
|---|
| 1717 | @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
 | 
|---|
| 1718 | Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
 | 
|---|
| 1719 | not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs.  Finally, there is an
 | 
|---|
| 1720 | extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported 
 | 
|---|
| 1721 | (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
 | 
|---|
| 1722 | These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12}, 
 | 
|---|
| 1723 | @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
 | 
|---|
| 1724 | @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll}, 
 | 
|---|
| 1725 | @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
 | 
|---|
| 1726 | @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}. 
 | 
|---|
| 1727 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1728 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1729 | @kindex --exclude-symbols
 | 
|---|
| 1730 | @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
 | 
|---|
| 1731 | Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
 | 
|---|
| 1732 | exported.  The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
 | 
|---|
| 1733 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1734 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1735 | @kindex --exclude-libs
 | 
|---|
| 1736 | @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
 | 
|---|
| 1737 | Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
 | 
|---|
| 1738 | exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons.  Specifying
 | 
|---|
| 1739 | @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
 | 
|---|
| 1740 | automatic export. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
 | 
|---|
| 1741 | regardless of this option. 
 | 
|---|
| 1742 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1743 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1744 | @kindex --file-alignment
 | 
|---|
| 1745 | @item --file-alignment
 | 
|---|
| 1746 | Specify the file alignment.  Sections in the file will always begin at
 | 
|---|
| 1747 | file offsets which are multiples of this number.  This defaults to
 | 
|---|
| 1748 | 512.
 | 
|---|
| 1749 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1750 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1751 | @cindex heap size
 | 
|---|
| 1752 | @kindex --heap
 | 
|---|
| 1753 | @item --heap @var{reserve}
 | 
|---|
| 1754 | @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
 | 
|---|
| 1755 | Specify the amount of memory to reserve (and optionally commit) to be
 | 
|---|
| 1756 | used as heap for this program.  The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
 | 
|---|
| 1757 | committed.
 | 
|---|
| 1758 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1759 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1760 | @cindex image base
 | 
|---|
| 1761 | @kindex --image-base
 | 
|---|
| 1762 | @item --image-base @var{value}
 | 
|---|
| 1763 | Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll.  This is
 | 
|---|
| 1764 | the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
 | 
|---|
| 1765 | is loaded.  To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
 | 
|---|
| 1766 | your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
 | 
|---|
| 1767 | other dlls.  The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
 | 
|---|
| 1768 | for dlls.
 | 
|---|
| 1769 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1770 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1771 | @kindex --kill-at
 | 
|---|
| 1772 | @item --kill-at
 | 
|---|
| 1773 | If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
 | 
|---|
| 1774 | symbols before they are exported.
 | 
|---|
| 1775 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1776 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1777 | @kindex --major-image-version
 | 
|---|
| 1778 | @item --major-image-version @var{value}
 | 
|---|
| 1779 | Sets the major number of the ``image version''.  Defaults to 1.
 | 
|---|
| 1780 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1781 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1782 | @kindex --major-os-version
 | 
|---|
| 1783 | @item --major-os-version @var{value}
 | 
|---|
| 1784 | Sets the major number of the ``os version''.  Defaults to 4.
 | 
|---|
| 1785 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1786 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1787 | @kindex --major-subsystem-version
 | 
|---|
| 1788 | @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
 | 
|---|
| 1789 | Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''.  Defaults to 4.
 | 
|---|
| 1790 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1791 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1792 | @kindex --minor-image-version
 | 
|---|
| 1793 | @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
 | 
|---|
| 1794 | Sets the minor number of the ``image version''.  Defaults to 0.
 | 
|---|
| 1795 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1796 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1797 | @kindex --minor-os-version
 | 
|---|
| 1798 | @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
 | 
|---|
| 1799 | Sets the minor number of the ``os version''.  Defaults to 0.
 | 
|---|
| 1800 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1801 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1802 | @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
 | 
|---|
| 1803 | @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
 | 
|---|
| 1804 | Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''.  Defaults to 0.
 | 
|---|
| 1805 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1806 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1807 | @cindex DEF files, creating
 | 
|---|
| 1808 | @cindex DLLs, creating
 | 
|---|
| 1809 | @kindex --output-def
 | 
|---|
| 1810 | @item --output-def @var{file}
 | 
|---|
| 1811 | The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
 | 
|---|
| 1812 | file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating.  This DEF file
 | 
|---|
| 1813 | (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
 | 
|---|
| 1814 | library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
 | 
|---|
| 1815 | automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
 | 
|---|
| 1816 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1817 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1818 | @cindex DLLs, creating
 | 
|---|
| 1819 | @kindex --out-implib
 | 
|---|
| 1820 | @item --out-implib @var{file}
 | 
|---|
| 1821 | The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
 | 
|---|
| 1822 | import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
 | 
|---|
| 1823 | import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
 | 
|---|
| 1824 | may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behavior
 | 
|---|
| 1825 | makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
 | 
|---|
| 1826 | creation step.
 | 
|---|
| 1827 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1828 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1829 | @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
 | 
|---|
| 1830 | @item --enable-auto-image-base
 | 
|---|
| 1831 | Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
 | 
|---|
| 1832 | using the @code{--image-base} argument.  By using a hash generated
 | 
|---|
| 1833 | from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
 | 
|---|
| 1834 | collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
 | 
|---|
| 1835 | avoided.
 | 
|---|
| 1836 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1837 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1838 | @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
 | 
|---|
| 1839 | @item --disable-auto-image-base
 | 
|---|
| 1840 | Do not automatically generate a unique image base.  If there is no
 | 
|---|
| 1841 | user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
 | 
|---|
| 1842 | default.
 | 
|---|
| 1843 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1844 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1845 | @cindex DLLs, linking to
 | 
|---|
| 1846 | @kindex --dll-search-prefix
 | 
|---|
| 1847 | @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
 | 
|---|
| 1848 | When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
 | 
|---|
| 1849 | search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to 
 | 
|---|
| 1850 | @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behavior allows easy distinction
 | 
|---|
| 1851 | between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
 | 
|---|
| 1852 | uwin, pw, etc.  For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
 | 
|---|
| 1853 | @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}. 
 | 
|---|
| 1854 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1855 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1856 | @kindex --enable-auto-import
 | 
|---|
| 1857 | @item --enable-auto-import
 | 
|---|
| 1858 | Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for 
 | 
|---|
| 1859 | DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when 
 | 
|---|
| 1860 | building the import libraries with those DATA exports.  This generally 
 | 
|---|
| 1861 | will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may see this message:
 | 
|---|
| 1862 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1863 | "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the 
 | 
|---|
| 1864 | documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
 | 
|---|
| 1865 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1866 | This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address 
 | 
|---|
| 1867 | ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only 
 | 
|---|
| 1868 | allow one).  Instances where this may occur include accesses to member 
 | 
|---|
| 1869 | fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a 
 | 
|---|
| 1870 | constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL.  Any 
 | 
|---|
| 1871 | multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
 | 
|---|
| 1872 | this error condition.  However, regardless of the exact data type
 | 
|---|
| 1873 | of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
 | 
|---|
| 1874 | the warning, and exit.
 | 
|---|
| 1875 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1876 | There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
 | 
|---|
| 1877 | data type of the exported variable:
 | 
|---|
| 1878 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1879 | One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
 | 
|---|
| 1880 | of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
 | 
|---|
| 1881 | this method works only when runtime environtment supports this feature.
 | 
|---|
| 1882 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1883 | A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable -- 
 | 
|---|
| 1884 | that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time.  For arrays, 
 | 
|---|
| 1885 | there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address) 
 | 
|---|
| 1886 | a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable.  Thus:
 | 
|---|
| 1887 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1888 | @example
 | 
|---|
| 1889 | extern type extern_array[];
 | 
|---|
| 1890 | extern_array[1] --> 
 | 
|---|
| 1891 |    @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
 | 
|---|
| 1892 | @end example
 | 
|---|
| 1893 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1894 | or
 | 
|---|
| 1895 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1896 | @example
 | 
|---|
| 1897 | extern type extern_array[];
 | 
|---|
| 1898 | extern_array[1] --> 
 | 
|---|
| 1899 |    @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
 | 
|---|
| 1900 | @end example
 | 
|---|
| 1901 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1902 | For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option 
 | 
|---|
| 1903 | is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
 | 
|---|
| 1904 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1905 | @example
 | 
|---|
| 1906 | extern struct s extern_struct;
 | 
|---|
| 1907 | extern_struct.field --> 
 | 
|---|
| 1908 |    @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
 | 
|---|
| 1909 | @end example
 | 
|---|
| 1910 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1911 | or
 | 
|---|
| 1912 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1913 | @example
 | 
|---|
| 1914 | extern long long extern_ll;
 | 
|---|
| 1915 | extern_ll -->
 | 
|---|
| 1916 |   @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
 | 
|---|
| 1917 | @end example
 | 
|---|
| 1918 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1919 | A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
 | 
|---|
| 1920 | 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with 
 | 
|---|
| 1921 | @code{__declspec(dllimport)}.  However, in practice that
 | 
|---|
| 1922 | requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
 | 
|---|
| 1923 | building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or 
 | 
|---|
| 1924 | merely building/linking to a static library.   In making the choice 
 | 
|---|
| 1925 | between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with 
 | 
|---|
| 1926 | constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
 | 
|---|
| 1927 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1928 | Original:
 | 
|---|
| 1929 | @example
 | 
|---|
| 1930 | --foo.h
 | 
|---|
| 1931 | extern int arr[];
 | 
|---|
| 1932 | --foo.c
 | 
|---|
| 1933 | #include "foo.h"
 | 
|---|
| 1934 | void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
 | 
|---|
| 1935 |   printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
 | 
|---|
| 1936 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 1937 | @end example
 | 
|---|
| 1938 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1939 | Solution 1:
 | 
|---|
| 1940 | @example
 | 
|---|
| 1941 | --foo.h
 | 
|---|
| 1942 | extern int arr[];
 | 
|---|
| 1943 | --foo.c
 | 
|---|
| 1944 | #include "foo.h"
 | 
|---|
| 1945 | void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
 | 
|---|
| 1946 |   /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
 | 
|---|
| 1947 |   volatile int *parr = arr;
 | 
|---|
| 1948 |   printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
 | 
|---|
| 1949 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 1950 | @end example
 | 
|---|
| 1951 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1952 | Solution 2:
 | 
|---|
| 1953 | @example
 | 
|---|
| 1954 | --foo.h
 | 
|---|
| 1955 | /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
 | 
|---|
| 1956 | #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
 | 
|---|
| 1957 |   !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
 | 
|---|
| 1958 | #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
 | 
|---|
| 1959 | #else
 | 
|---|
| 1960 | #define FOO_IMPORT
 | 
|---|
| 1961 | #endif
 | 
|---|
| 1962 | extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
 | 
|---|
| 1963 | --foo.c
 | 
|---|
| 1964 | #include "foo.h"
 | 
|---|
| 1965 | void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
 | 
|---|
| 1966 |   printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
 | 
|---|
| 1967 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 1968 | @end example
 | 
|---|
| 1969 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1970 | A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your 
 | 
|---|
| 1971 | library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
 | 
|---|
| 1972 | for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
 | 
|---|
| 1973 | functions).
 | 
|---|
| 1974 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1975 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1976 | @kindex --disable-auto-import
 | 
|---|
| 1977 | @item --disable-auto-import
 | 
|---|
| 1978 | Do not attempt to do sophisticalted linking of @code{_symbol} to 
 | 
|---|
| 1979 | @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
 | 
|---|
| 1980 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1981 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1982 | @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
 | 
|---|
| 1983 | @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
 | 
|---|
| 1984 | If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
 | 
|---|
| 1985 | that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
 | 
|---|
| 1986 | a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
 | 
|---|
| 1987 | environment to adjust references to such data in your client code. 
 | 
|---|
| 1988 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1989 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1990 | @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
 | 
|---|
| 1991 | @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
 | 
|---|
| 1992 | Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
 | 
|---|
| 1993 | DLLs.  This is the default.
 | 
|---|
| 1994 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 1995 | 
 | 
|---|
| 1996 | @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
 | 
|---|
| 1997 | @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
 | 
|---|
| 1998 | Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
 | 
|---|
| 1999 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 2000 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2001 | @kindex --section-alignment
 | 
|---|
| 2002 | @item --section-alignment
 | 
|---|
| 2003 | Sets the section alignment.  Sections in memory will always begin at
 | 
|---|
| 2004 | addresses which are a multiple of this number.  Defaults to 0x1000.
 | 
|---|
| 2005 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 2006 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2007 | @cindex stack size
 | 
|---|
| 2008 | @kindex --stack
 | 
|---|
| 2009 | @item --stack @var{reserve}
 | 
|---|
| 2010 | @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
 | 
|---|
| 2011 | Specify the amount of memory to reserve (and optionally commit) to be
 | 
|---|
| 2012 | used as stack for this program.  The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
 | 
|---|
| 2013 | committed.
 | 
|---|
| 2014 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 2015 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2016 | @kindex --subsystem
 | 
|---|
| 2017 | @item --subsystem @var{which}
 | 
|---|
| 2018 | @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
 | 
|---|
| 2019 | @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
 | 
|---|
| 2020 | Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute.  The
 | 
|---|
| 2021 | legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
 | 
|---|
| 2022 | @code{console}, and @code{posix}.  You may optionally set the
 | 
|---|
| 2023 | subsystem version also.
 | 
|---|
| 2024 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
 | 
|---|
| 2025 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2026 | @end table
 | 
|---|
| 2027 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2028 | @c man end
 | 
|---|
| 2029 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2030 | @ifset UsesEnvVars
 | 
|---|
| 2031 | @node Environment
 | 
|---|
| 2032 | @section Environment Variables
 | 
|---|
| 2033 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2034 | @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
 | 
|---|
| 2035 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2036 | You can change the behavior of @command{ld} with the environment variables
 | 
|---|
| 2037 | @ifclear SingleFormat
 | 
|---|
| 2038 | @code{GNUTARGET},
 | 
|---|
| 2039 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 2040 | @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
 | 
|---|
| 2041 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2042 | @ifclear SingleFormat
 | 
|---|
| 2043 | @kindex GNUTARGET
 | 
|---|
| 2044 | @cindex default input format
 | 
|---|
| 2045 | @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
 | 
|---|
| 2046 | use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}).  Its value should be one
 | 
|---|
| 2047 | of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}).  If there is no
 | 
|---|
| 2048 | @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
 | 
|---|
| 2049 | of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
 | 
|---|
| 2050 | attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
 | 
|---|
| 2051 | this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
 | 
|---|
| 2052 | there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
 | 
|---|
| 2053 | object-file formats is unique.  However, the configuration procedure for
 | 
|---|
| 2054 | BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
 | 
|---|
| 2055 | in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
 | 
|---|
| 2056 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 2057 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2058 | @kindex LDEMULATION
 | 
|---|
| 2059 | @cindex default emulation
 | 
|---|
| 2060 | @cindex emulation, default
 | 
|---|
| 2061 | @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
 | 
|---|
| 2062 | @samp{-m} option.  The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
 | 
|---|
| 2063 | behaviour, particularly the default linker script.  You can list the
 | 
|---|
| 2064 | available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.  If
 | 
|---|
| 2065 | the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
 | 
|---|
| 2066 | variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
 | 
|---|
| 2067 | linker was configured.
 | 
|---|
| 2068 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2069 | @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
 | 
|---|
| 2070 | @cindex demangling, default
 | 
|---|
| 2071 | Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols.  However, if
 | 
|---|
| 2072 | @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
 | 
|---|
| 2073 | default to not demangling symbols.  This environment variable is used in
 | 
|---|
| 2074 | a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program.  The default
 | 
|---|
| 2075 | may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
 | 
|---|
| 2076 | options.
 | 
|---|
| 2077 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2078 | @c man end
 | 
|---|
| 2079 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 2080 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2081 | @node Scripts
 | 
|---|
| 2082 | @chapter Linker Scripts
 | 
|---|
| 2083 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2084 | @cindex scripts
 | 
|---|
| 2085 | @cindex linker scripts
 | 
|---|
| 2086 | @cindex command files
 | 
|---|
| 2087 | Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}.  This script is
 | 
|---|
| 2088 | written in the linker command language.
 | 
|---|
| 2089 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2090 | The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
 | 
|---|
| 2091 | the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
 | 
|---|
| 2092 | the memory layout of the output file.  Most linker scripts do nothing
 | 
|---|
| 2093 | more than this.  However, when necessary, the linker script can also
 | 
|---|
| 2094 | direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
 | 
|---|
| 2095 | described below.
 | 
|---|
| 2096 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2097 | The linker always uses a linker script.  If you do not supply one
 | 
|---|
| 2098 | yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
 | 
|---|
| 2099 | linker executable.  You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
 | 
|---|
| 2100 | to display the default linker script.  Certain command line options,
 | 
|---|
| 2101 | such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
 | 
|---|
| 2102 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2103 | You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
 | 
|---|
| 2104 | line option.  When you do this, your linker script will replace the
 | 
|---|
| 2105 | default linker script.
 | 
|---|
| 2106 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2107 | You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
 | 
|---|
| 2108 | to the linker, as though they were files to be linked.  @xref{Implicit
 | 
|---|
| 2109 | Linker Scripts}.
 | 
|---|
| 2110 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2111 | @menu
 | 
|---|
| 2112 | * Basic Script Concepts::       Basic Linker Script Concepts
 | 
|---|
| 2113 | * Script Format::               Linker Script Format
 | 
|---|
| 2114 | * Simple Example::              Simple Linker Script Example
 | 
|---|
| 2115 | * Simple Commands::             Simple Linker Script Commands
 | 
|---|
| 2116 | * Assignments::                 Assigning Values to Symbols
 | 
|---|
| 2117 | * SECTIONS::                    SECTIONS Command
 | 
|---|
| 2118 | * MEMORY::                      MEMORY Command
 | 
|---|
| 2119 | * PHDRS::                       PHDRS Command
 | 
|---|
| 2120 | * VERSION::                     VERSION Command
 | 
|---|
| 2121 | * Expressions::                 Expressions in Linker Scripts
 | 
|---|
| 2122 | * Implicit Linker Scripts::     Implicit Linker Scripts
 | 
|---|
| 2123 | @end menu
 | 
|---|
| 2124 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2125 | @node Basic Script Concepts
 | 
|---|
| 2126 | @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
 | 
|---|
| 2127 | @cindex linker script concepts
 | 
|---|
| 2128 | We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
 | 
|---|
| 2129 | describe the linker script language.
 | 
|---|
| 2130 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2131 | The linker combines input files into a single output file.  The output
 | 
|---|
| 2132 | file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
 | 
|---|
| 2133 | @dfn{object file format}.  Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
 | 
|---|
| 2134 | The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
 | 
|---|
| 2135 | purposes we will also call it an object file.  Each object file has,
 | 
|---|
| 2136 | among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}.  We sometimes refer to a
 | 
|---|
| 2137 | section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
 | 
|---|
| 2138 | in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
 | 
|---|
| 2139 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2140 | Each section in an object file has a name and a size.  Most sections
 | 
|---|
| 2141 | also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
 | 
|---|
| 2142 | contents}.  A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
 | 
|---|
| 2143 | the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
 | 
|---|
| 2144 | A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
 | 
|---|
| 2145 | area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
 | 
|---|
| 2146 | loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out).  A section
 | 
|---|
| 2147 | which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
 | 
|---|
| 2148 | of debugging information.
 | 
|---|
| 2149 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2150 | Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses.  The
 | 
|---|
| 2151 | first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address.  This is the address
 | 
|---|
| 2152 | the section will have when the output file is run.  The second is the
 | 
|---|
| 2153 | @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address.  This is the address at which the
 | 
|---|
| 2154 | section will be loaded.  In most cases the two addresses will be the
 | 
|---|
| 2155 | same.  An example of when they might be different is when a data section
 | 
|---|
| 2156 | is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
 | 
|---|
| 2157 | (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
 | 
|---|
| 2158 | based system).  In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
 | 
|---|
| 2159 | RAM address would be the VMA.
 | 
|---|
| 2160 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2161 | You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
 | 
|---|
| 2162 | program with the @samp{-h} option.
 | 
|---|
| 2163 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2164 | Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
 | 
|---|
| 2165 | @dfn{symbol table}.  A symbol may be defined or undefined.  Each symbol
 | 
|---|
| 2166 | has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
 | 
|---|
| 2167 | information.  If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
 | 
|---|
| 2168 | will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
 | 
|---|
| 2169 | static variable.  Every undefined function or global variable which is
 | 
|---|
| 2170 | referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
 | 
|---|
| 2171 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2172 | You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
 | 
|---|
| 2173 | program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
 | 
|---|
| 2174 | option.
 | 
|---|
| 2175 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2176 | @node Script Format
 | 
|---|
| 2177 | @section Linker Script Format
 | 
|---|
| 2178 | @cindex linker script format
 | 
|---|
| 2179 | Linker scripts are text files.
 | 
|---|
| 2180 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2181 | You write a linker script as a series of commands.  Each command is
 | 
|---|
| 2182 | either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
 | 
|---|
| 2183 | symbol.  You may separate commands using semicolons.  Whitespace is
 | 
|---|
| 2184 | generally ignored.
 | 
|---|
| 2185 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2186 | Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
 | 
|---|
| 2187 | If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
 | 
|---|
| 2188 | otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
 | 
|---|
| 2189 | double quotes.  There is no way to use a double quote character in a
 | 
|---|
| 2190 | file name.
 | 
|---|
| 2191 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2192 | You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
 | 
|---|
| 2193 | @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}.  As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
 | 
|---|
| 2194 | to whitespace.
 | 
|---|
| 2195 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2196 | @node Simple Example
 | 
|---|
| 2197 | @section Simple Linker Script Example
 | 
|---|
| 2198 | @cindex linker script example
 | 
|---|
| 2199 | @cindex example of linker script
 | 
|---|
| 2200 | Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
 | 
|---|
| 2201 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2202 | The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
 | 
|---|
| 2203 | @samp{SECTIONS}.  You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
 | 
|---|
| 2204 | memory layout of the output file.
 | 
|---|
| 2205 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2206 | The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command.  Here we will
 | 
|---|
| 2207 | describe a simple use of it.  Let's assume your program consists only of
 | 
|---|
| 2208 | code, initialized data, and uninitialized data.  These will be in the
 | 
|---|
| 2209 | @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
 | 
|---|
| 2210 | Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
 | 
|---|
| 2211 | your input files.
 | 
|---|
| 2212 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2213 | For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
 | 
|---|
| 2214 | 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000.  Here is a
 | 
|---|
| 2215 | linker script which will do that:
 | 
|---|
| 2216 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2217 | SECTIONS
 | 
|---|
| 2218 | @{
 | 
|---|
| 2219 |   . = 0x10000;
 | 
|---|
| 2220 |   .text : @{ *(.text) @}
 | 
|---|
| 2221 |   . = 0x8000000;
 | 
|---|
| 2222 |   .data : @{ *(.data) @}
 | 
|---|
| 2223 |   .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
 | 
|---|
| 2224 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 2225 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2226 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2227 | You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
 | 
|---|
| 2228 | followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
 | 
|---|
| 2229 | descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
 | 
|---|
| 2230 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2231 | The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
 | 
|---|
| 2232 | sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
 | 
|---|
| 2233 | counter.  If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
 | 
|---|
| 2234 | other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
 | 
|---|
| 2235 | current value of the location counter.  The location counter is then
 | 
|---|
| 2236 | incremented by the size of the output section.  At the start of the
 | 
|---|
| 2237 | @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
 | 
|---|
| 2238 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2239 | The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}.  The colon is
 | 
|---|
| 2240 | required syntax which may be ignored for now.  Within the curly braces
 | 
|---|
| 2241 | after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
 | 
|---|
| 2242 | which should be placed into this output section.  The @samp{*} is a
 | 
|---|
| 2243 | wildcard which matches any file name.  The expression @samp{*(.text)}
 | 
|---|
| 2244 | means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
 | 
|---|
| 2245 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2246 | Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
 | 
|---|
| 2247 | @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
 | 
|---|
| 2248 | @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
 | 
|---|
| 2249 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2250 | The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
 | 
|---|
| 2251 | the output file.  The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
 | 
|---|
| 2252 | at address @samp{0x8000000}.  After the linker places the @samp{.data}
 | 
|---|
| 2253 | output section, the value of the location counter will be
 | 
|---|
| 2254 | @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section.  The
 | 
|---|
| 2255 | effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
 | 
|---|
| 2256 | immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory
 | 
|---|
| 2257 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2258 | The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
 | 
|---|
| 2259 | alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary.  In this
 | 
|---|
| 2260 | example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
 | 
|---|
| 2261 | sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
 | 
|---|
| 2262 | may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
 | 
|---|
| 2263 | sections.
 | 
|---|
| 2264 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2265 | That's it!  That's a simple and complete linker script.
 | 
|---|
| 2266 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2267 | @node Simple Commands
 | 
|---|
| 2268 | @section Simple Linker Script Commands
 | 
|---|
| 2269 | @cindex linker script simple commands
 | 
|---|
| 2270 | In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
 | 
|---|
| 2271 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2272 | @menu
 | 
|---|
| 2273 | * Entry Point::                 Setting the entry point
 | 
|---|
| 2274 | * File Commands::               Commands dealing with files
 | 
|---|
| 2275 | @ifclear SingleFormat
 | 
|---|
| 2276 | * Format Commands::             Commands dealing with object file formats
 | 
|---|
| 2277 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 2278 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2279 | * Miscellaneous Commands::      Other linker script commands
 | 
|---|
| 2280 | @end menu
 | 
|---|
| 2281 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2282 | @node Entry Point
 | 
|---|
| 2283 | @subsection Setting the Entry Point
 | 
|---|
| 2284 | @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
 | 
|---|
| 2285 | @cindex start of execution
 | 
|---|
| 2286 | @cindex first instruction
 | 
|---|
| 2287 | @cindex entry point
 | 
|---|
| 2288 | The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
 | 
|---|
| 2289 | point}.  You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
 | 
|---|
| 2290 | entry point.  The argument is a symbol name:
 | 
|---|
| 2291 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2292 | ENTRY(@var{symbol})
 | 
|---|
| 2293 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2294 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2295 | There are several ways to set the entry point.  The linker will set the
 | 
|---|
| 2296 | entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
 | 
|---|
| 2297 | stopping when one of them succeeds:
 | 
|---|
| 2298 | @itemize @bullet
 | 
|---|
| 2299 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 2300 | the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
 | 
|---|
| 2301 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 2302 | the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
 | 
|---|
| 2303 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 2304 | the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
 | 
|---|
| 2305 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 2306 | the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
 | 
|---|
| 2307 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 2308 | The address @code{0}.
 | 
|---|
| 2309 | @end itemize
 | 
|---|
| 2310 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2311 | @node File Commands
 | 
|---|
| 2312 | @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
 | 
|---|
| 2313 | @cindex linker script file commands
 | 
|---|
| 2314 | Several linker script commands deal with files.
 | 
|---|
| 2315 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2316 | @table @code
 | 
|---|
| 2317 | @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
 | 
|---|
| 2318 | @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
 | 
|---|
| 2319 | @cindex including a linker script
 | 
|---|
| 2320 | Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point.  The file will
 | 
|---|
| 2321 | be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
 | 
|---|
| 2322 | with the @option{-L} option.  You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
 | 
|---|
| 2323 | 10 levels deep.
 | 
|---|
| 2324 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2325 | @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
 | 
|---|
| 2326 | @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
 | 
|---|
| 2327 | @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
 | 
|---|
| 2328 | @cindex input files in linker scripts
 | 
|---|
| 2329 | @cindex input object files in linker scripts
 | 
|---|
| 2330 | @cindex linker script input object files
 | 
|---|
| 2331 | The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
 | 
|---|
| 2332 | in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
 | 
|---|
| 2333 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2334 | For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
 | 
|---|
| 2335 | a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
 | 
|---|
| 2336 | then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
 | 
|---|
| 2337 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2338 | In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
 | 
|---|
| 2339 | script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
 | 
|---|
| 2340 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2341 | In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
 | 
|---|
| 2342 | with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
 | 
|---|
| 2343 | located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
 | 
|---|
| 2344 | for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}.  Otherwise, the linker will try to
 | 
|---|
| 2345 | open the file in the current directory.  If it is not found, the
 | 
|---|
| 2346 | linker will search through the archive library search path.  See the
 | 
|---|
| 2347 | description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
 | 
|---|
| 2348 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2349 | If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
 | 
|---|
| 2350 | name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
 | 
|---|
| 2351 | @samp{-l}.
 | 
|---|
| 2352 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2353 | When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
 | 
|---|
| 2354 | files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
 | 
|---|
| 2355 | script file is included.  This can affect archive searching.
 | 
|---|
| 2356 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2357 | @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
 | 
|---|
| 2358 | @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
 | 
|---|
| 2359 | @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
 | 
|---|
| 2360 | @cindex grouping input files
 | 
|---|
| 2361 | The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
 | 
|---|
| 2362 | files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
 | 
|---|
| 2363 | new undefined references are created.  See the description of @samp{-(}
 | 
|---|
| 2364 | in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
 | 
|---|
| 2365 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2366 | @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
 | 
|---|
| 2367 | @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
 | 
|---|
| 2368 | @cindex output file name in linker scripot
 | 
|---|
| 2369 | The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file.  Using
 | 
|---|
| 2370 | @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
 | 
|---|
| 2371 | @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
 | 
|---|
| 2372 | Line Options}).  If both are used, the command line option takes
 | 
|---|
| 2373 | precedence.
 | 
|---|
| 2374 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2375 | You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
 | 
|---|
| 2376 | output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
 | 
|---|
| 2377 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2378 | @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
 | 
|---|
| 2379 | @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
 | 
|---|
| 2380 | @cindex library search path in linker script
 | 
|---|
| 2381 | @cindex archive search path in linker script
 | 
|---|
| 2382 | @cindex search path in linker script
 | 
|---|
| 2383 | The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
 | 
|---|
| 2384 | @command{ld} looks for archive libraries.  Using
 | 
|---|
| 2385 | @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
 | 
|---|
| 2386 | on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}).  If both
 | 
|---|
| 2387 | are used, then the linker will search both paths.  Paths specified using
 | 
|---|
| 2388 | the command line option are searched first.
 | 
|---|
| 2389 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2390 | @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
 | 
|---|
| 2391 | @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
 | 
|---|
| 2392 | @cindex first input file
 | 
|---|
| 2393 | The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
 | 
|---|
| 2394 | that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
 | 
|---|
| 2395 | though it were specified first on the command line.  This may be useful
 | 
|---|
| 2396 | when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
 | 
|---|
| 2397 | first file.
 | 
|---|
| 2398 | @end table
 | 
|---|
| 2399 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2400 | @ifclear SingleFormat
 | 
|---|
| 2401 | @node Format Commands
 | 
|---|
| 2402 | @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
 | 
|---|
| 2403 | A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
 | 
|---|
| 2404 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2405 | @table @code
 | 
|---|
| 2406 | @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
 | 
|---|
| 2407 | @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
 | 
|---|
| 2408 | @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
 | 
|---|
| 2409 | @cindex output file format in linker script
 | 
|---|
| 2410 | The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
 | 
|---|
| 2411 | output file (@pxref{BFD}).  Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
 | 
|---|
| 2412 | exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
 | 
|---|
| 2413 | (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}).  If both are used, the command
 | 
|---|
| 2414 | line option takes precedence.
 | 
|---|
| 2415 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2416 | You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
 | 
|---|
| 2417 | formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
 | 
|---|
| 2418 | This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
 | 
|---|
| 2419 | desired endianness.
 | 
|---|
| 2420 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2421 | If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
 | 
|---|
| 2422 | will be the first argument, @var{default}.  If @samp{-EB} is used, the
 | 
|---|
| 2423 | output format will be the second argument, @var{big}.  If @samp{-EL} is
 | 
|---|
| 2424 | used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
 | 
|---|
| 2425 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2426 | For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
 | 
|---|
| 2427 | command:
 | 
|---|
| 2428 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2429 | OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
 | 
|---|
| 2430 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2431 | This says that the default format for the output file is
 | 
|---|
| 2432 | @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
 | 
|---|
| 2433 | option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
 | 
|---|
| 2434 | format.
 | 
|---|
| 2435 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2436 | @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
 | 
|---|
| 2437 | @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
 | 
|---|
| 2438 | @cindex input file format in linker script
 | 
|---|
| 2439 | The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
 | 
|---|
| 2440 | files.  It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
 | 
|---|
| 2441 | This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
 | 
|---|
| 2442 | (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}).  If the @code{TARGET} command
 | 
|---|
| 2443 | is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
 | 
|---|
| 2444 | command is also used to set the format for the output file.  @xref{BFD}.
 | 
|---|
| 2445 | @end table
 | 
|---|
| 2446 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 2447 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2448 | @node Miscellaneous Commands
 | 
|---|
| 2449 | @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
 | 
|---|
| 2450 | There are a few other linker scripts commands.
 | 
|---|
| 2451 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2452 | @table @code
 | 
|---|
| 2453 | @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
 | 
|---|
| 2454 | @kindex ASSERT
 | 
|---|
| 2455 | @cindex assertion in linker script
 | 
|---|
| 2456 | Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero.  If it is zero, then exit the linker
 | 
|---|
| 2457 | with an error code, and print @var{message}.
 | 
|---|
| 2458 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2459 | @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
 | 
|---|
| 2460 | @kindex EXTERN
 | 
|---|
| 2461 | @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
 | 
|---|
| 2462 | Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
 | 
|---|
| 2463 | symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
 | 
|---|
| 2464 | modules from standard libraries.  You may list several @var{symbol}s for
 | 
|---|
| 2465 | each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times.  This
 | 
|---|
| 2466 | command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
 | 
|---|
| 2467 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2468 | @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
 | 
|---|
| 2469 | @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
 | 
|---|
| 2470 | @cindex common allocation in linker script
 | 
|---|
| 2471 | This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
 | 
|---|
| 2472 | to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
 | 
|---|
| 2473 | output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
 | 
|---|
| 2474 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2475 | @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
 | 
|---|
| 2476 | @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
 | 
|---|
| 2477 | @cindex common allocation in linker script
 | 
|---|
| 2478 | This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
 | 
|---|
| 2479 | command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
 | 
|---|
| 2480 | to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
 | 
|---|
| 2481 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2482 | @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
 | 
|---|
| 2483 | @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
 | 
|---|
| 2484 | @cindex cross references
 | 
|---|
| 2485 | This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
 | 
|---|
| 2486 | references among certain output sections.
 | 
|---|
| 2487 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2488 | In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
 | 
|---|
| 2489 | using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
 | 
|---|
| 2490 | will not be.  Any direct references between the two sections would be
 | 
|---|
| 2491 | errors.  For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
 | 
|---|
| 2492 | a function defined in the other section.
 | 
|---|
| 2493 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2494 | The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names.  If
 | 
|---|
| 2495 | @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
 | 
|---|
| 2496 | an error and returns a non-zero exit status.  Note that the
 | 
|---|
| 2497 | @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
 | 
|---|
| 2498 | names.
 | 
|---|
| 2499 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2500 | @ifclear SingleFormat
 | 
|---|
| 2501 | @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
 | 
|---|
| 2502 | @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
 | 
|---|
| 2503 | @cindex machine architecture
 | 
|---|
| 2504 | @cindex architecture
 | 
|---|
| 2505 | Specify a particular output machine architecture.  The argument is one
 | 
|---|
| 2506 | of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}).  You can see the
 | 
|---|
| 2507 | architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
 | 
|---|
| 2508 | the @samp{-f} option.
 | 
|---|
| 2509 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 2510 | @end table
 | 
|---|
| 2511 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2512 | @node Assignments
 | 
|---|
| 2513 | @section Assigning Values to Symbols
 | 
|---|
| 2514 | @cindex assignment in scripts
 | 
|---|
| 2515 | @cindex symbol definition, scripts
 | 
|---|
| 2516 | @cindex variables, defining
 | 
|---|
| 2517 | You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script.  This will define
 | 
|---|
| 2518 | the symbol as a global symbol.
 | 
|---|
| 2519 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2520 | @menu
 | 
|---|
| 2521 | * Simple Assignments::          Simple Assignments
 | 
|---|
| 2522 | * PROVIDE::                     PROVIDE
 | 
|---|
| 2523 | @end menu
 | 
|---|
| 2524 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2525 | @node Simple Assignments
 | 
|---|
| 2526 | @subsection Simple Assignments
 | 
|---|
| 2527 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2528 | You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
 | 
|---|
| 2529 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2530 | @table @code
 | 
|---|
| 2531 | @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
 | 
|---|
| 2532 | @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
 | 
|---|
| 2533 | @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
 | 
|---|
| 2534 | @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
 | 
|---|
| 2535 | @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
 | 
|---|
| 2536 | @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
 | 
|---|
| 2537 | @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
 | 
|---|
| 2538 | @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
 | 
|---|
| 2539 | @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
 | 
|---|
| 2540 | @end table
 | 
|---|
| 2541 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2542 | The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
 | 
|---|
| 2543 | @var{expression}.  In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
 | 
|---|
| 2544 | defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
 | 
|---|
| 2545 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2546 | The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter.  You
 | 
|---|
| 2547 | may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command.
 | 
|---|
| 2548 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2549 | The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
 | 
|---|
| 2550 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2551 | Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
 | 
|---|
| 2552 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2553 | You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
 | 
|---|
| 2554 | statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
 | 
|---|
| 2555 | section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
 | 
|---|
| 2556 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2557 | The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
 | 
|---|
| 2558 | expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
 | 
|---|
| 2559 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2560 | Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
 | 
|---|
| 2561 | assignments may be used:
 | 
|---|
| 2562 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2563 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2564 | floating_point = 0;
 | 
|---|
| 2565 | SECTIONS
 | 
|---|
| 2566 | @{
 | 
|---|
| 2567 |   .text :
 | 
|---|
| 2568 |     @{
 | 
|---|
| 2569 |       *(.text)
 | 
|---|
| 2570 |       _etext = .;
 | 
|---|
| 2571 |     @}
 | 
|---|
| 2572 |   _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
 | 
|---|
| 2573 |   .data : @{ *(.data) @}
 | 
|---|
| 2574 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 2575 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2576 | @noindent
 | 
|---|
| 2577 | In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
 | 
|---|
| 2578 | zero.  The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
 | 
|---|
| 2579 | the last @samp{.text} input section.  The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
 | 
|---|
| 2580 | defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
 | 
|---|
| 2581 | upward to a 4 byte boundary.
 | 
|---|
| 2582 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2583 | @node PROVIDE
 | 
|---|
| 2584 | @subsection PROVIDE
 | 
|---|
| 2585 | @cindex PROVIDE
 | 
|---|
| 2586 | In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
 | 
|---|
| 2587 | only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
 | 
|---|
| 2588 | the link.  For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
 | 
|---|
| 2589 | @samp{etext}.  However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
 | 
|---|
| 2590 | @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error.  The
 | 
|---|
| 2591 | @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
 | 
|---|
| 2592 | @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined.  The syntax is
 | 
|---|
| 2593 | @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
 | 
|---|
| 2594 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2595 | Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
 | 
|---|
| 2596 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2597 | SECTIONS
 | 
|---|
| 2598 | @{
 | 
|---|
| 2599 |   .text :
 | 
|---|
| 2600 |     @{
 | 
|---|
| 2601 |       *(.text)
 | 
|---|
| 2602 |       _etext = .;
 | 
|---|
| 2603 |       PROVIDE(etext = .);
 | 
|---|
| 2604 |     @}
 | 
|---|
| 2605 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 2606 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2607 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2608 | In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
 | 
|---|
| 2609 | underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error.  If, on
 | 
|---|
| 2610 | the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
 | 
|---|
| 2611 | underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
 | 
|---|
| 2612 | If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
 | 
|---|
| 2613 | linker will use the definition in the linker script.
 | 
|---|
| 2614 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2615 | @node SECTIONS
 | 
|---|
| 2616 | @section SECTIONS Command
 | 
|---|
| 2617 | @kindex SECTIONS
 | 
|---|
| 2618 | The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
 | 
|---|
| 2619 | into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
 | 
|---|
| 2620 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2621 | The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
 | 
|---|
| 2622 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2623 | SECTIONS
 | 
|---|
| 2624 | @{
 | 
|---|
| 2625 |   @var{sections-command}
 | 
|---|
| 2626 |   @var{sections-command}
 | 
|---|
| 2627 |   @dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 2628 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 2629 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2630 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2631 | Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
 | 
|---|
| 2632 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2633 | @itemize @bullet
 | 
|---|
| 2634 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 2635 | an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
 | 
|---|
| 2636 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 2637 | a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
 | 
|---|
| 2638 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 2639 | an output section description
 | 
|---|
| 2640 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 2641 | an overlay description
 | 
|---|
| 2642 | @end itemize
 | 
|---|
| 2643 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2644 | The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
 | 
|---|
| 2645 | @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
 | 
|---|
| 2646 | those commands.  This can also make the linker script easier to
 | 
|---|
| 2647 | understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
 | 
|---|
| 2648 | the layout of the output file.
 | 
|---|
| 2649 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2650 | Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
 | 
|---|
| 2651 | below.
 | 
|---|
| 2652 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2653 | If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
 | 
|---|
| 2654 | linker will place each input section into an identically named output
 | 
|---|
| 2655 | section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
 | 
|---|
| 2656 | input files.  If all input sections are present in the first file, for
 | 
|---|
| 2657 | example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
 | 
|---|
| 2658 | in the first input file.  The first section will be at address zero.
 | 
|---|
| 2659 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2660 | @menu
 | 
|---|
| 2661 | * Output Section Description::  Output section description
 | 
|---|
| 2662 | * Output Section Name::         Output section name
 | 
|---|
| 2663 | * Output Section Address::      Output section address
 | 
|---|
| 2664 | * Input Section::               Input section description
 | 
|---|
| 2665 | * Output Section Data::         Output section data
 | 
|---|
| 2666 | * Output Section Keywords::     Output section keywords
 | 
|---|
| 2667 | * Output Section Discarding::   Output section discarding
 | 
|---|
| 2668 | * Output Section Attributes::   Output section attributes
 | 
|---|
| 2669 | * Overlay Description::         Overlay description
 | 
|---|
| 2670 | @end menu
 | 
|---|
| 2671 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2672 | @node Output Section Description
 | 
|---|
| 2673 | @subsection Output Section Description
 | 
|---|
| 2674 | The full description of an output section looks like this:
 | 
|---|
| 2675 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2676 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 2677 | @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] : [AT(@var{lma})]
 | 
|---|
| 2678 |   @{
 | 
|---|
| 2679 |     @var{output-section-command}
 | 
|---|
| 2680 |     @var{output-section-command}
 | 
|---|
| 2681 |     @dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 2682 |   @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
 | 
|---|
| 2683 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 2684 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2685 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2686 | Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
 | 
|---|
| 2687 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2688 | The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
 | 
|---|
| 2689 | name is unambiguous.  The colon and the curly braces are also required.
 | 
|---|
| 2690 | The line breaks and other white space are optional.
 | 
|---|
| 2691 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2692 | Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
 | 
|---|
| 2693 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2694 | @itemize @bullet
 | 
|---|
| 2695 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 2696 | a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
 | 
|---|
| 2697 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 2698 | an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
 | 
|---|
| 2699 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 2700 | data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
 | 
|---|
| 2701 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 2702 | a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
 | 
|---|
| 2703 | @end itemize
 | 
|---|
| 2704 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2705 | @node Output Section Name
 | 
|---|
| 2706 | @subsection Output Section Name
 | 
|---|
| 2707 | @cindex name, section
 | 
|---|
| 2708 | @cindex section name
 | 
|---|
| 2709 | The name of the output section is @var{section}.  @var{section} must
 | 
|---|
| 2710 | meet the constraints of your output format.  In formats which only
 | 
|---|
| 2711 | support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
 | 
|---|
| 2712 | must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
 | 
|---|
| 2713 | example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
 | 
|---|
| 2714 | output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
 | 
|---|
| 2715 | names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
 | 
|---|
| 2716 | quoted numeric string.  A section name may consist of any sequence of
 | 
|---|
| 2717 | characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
 | 
|---|
| 2718 | commas must be quoted.
 | 
|---|
| 2719 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2720 | The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
 | 
|---|
| 2721 | Discarding}.
 | 
|---|
| 2722 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2723 | @node Output Section Address
 | 
|---|
| 2724 | @subsection Output Section Description
 | 
|---|
| 2725 | @cindex address, section
 | 
|---|
| 2726 | @cindex section address
 | 
|---|
| 2727 | The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
 | 
|---|
| 2728 | address) of the output section.  If you do not provide @var{address},
 | 
|---|
| 2729 | the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
 | 
|---|
| 2730 | based on the current value of the location counter.
 | 
|---|
| 2731 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2732 | If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
 | 
|---|
| 2733 | set to precisely that.  If you provide neither @var{address} nor
 | 
|---|
| 2734 | @var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
 | 
|---|
| 2735 | current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
 | 
|---|
| 2736 | requirements of the output section.  The alignment requirement of the
 | 
|---|
| 2737 | output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
 | 
|---|
| 2738 | within the output section.
 | 
|---|
| 2739 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2740 | For example,
 | 
|---|
| 2741 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2742 | .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
 | 
|---|
| 2743 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2744 | @noindent
 | 
|---|
| 2745 | and
 | 
|---|
| 2746 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2747 | .text : @{ *(.text) @}
 | 
|---|
| 2748 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2749 | @noindent
 | 
|---|
| 2750 | are subtly different.  The first will set the address of the
 | 
|---|
| 2751 | @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
 | 
|---|
| 2752 | counter.  The second will set it to the current value of the location
 | 
|---|
| 2753 | counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
 | 
|---|
| 2754 | section.
 | 
|---|
| 2755 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2756 | The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
 | 
|---|
| 2757 | For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
 | 
|---|
| 2758 | so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
 | 
|---|
| 2759 | do something like this:
 | 
|---|
| 2760 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2761 | .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
 | 
|---|
| 2762 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2763 | @noindent
 | 
|---|
| 2764 | This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
 | 
|---|
| 2765 | aligned upward to the specified value.
 | 
|---|
| 2766 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2767 | Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
 | 
|---|
| 2768 | location counter.
 | 
|---|
| 2769 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2770 | @node Input Section
 | 
|---|
| 2771 | @subsection Input Section Description
 | 
|---|
| 2772 | @cindex input sections
 | 
|---|
| 2773 | @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
 | 
|---|
| 2774 | The most common output section command is an input section description.
 | 
|---|
| 2775 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2776 | The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
 | 
|---|
| 2777 | You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
 | 
|---|
| 2778 | in memory.  You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
 | 
|---|
| 2779 | map the input files into your memory layout.
 | 
|---|
| 2780 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2781 | @menu
 | 
|---|
| 2782 | * Input Section Basics::        Input section basics
 | 
|---|
| 2783 | * Input Section Wildcards::     Input section wildcard patterns
 | 
|---|
| 2784 | * Input Section Common::        Input section for common symbols
 | 
|---|
| 2785 | * Input Section Keep::          Input section and garbage collection
 | 
|---|
| 2786 | * Input Section Example::       Input section example
 | 
|---|
| 2787 | @end menu
 | 
|---|
| 2788 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2789 | @node Input Section Basics
 | 
|---|
| 2790 | @subsubsection Input Section Basics
 | 
|---|
| 2791 | @cindex input section basics
 | 
|---|
| 2792 | An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
 | 
|---|
| 2793 | by a list of section names in parentheses.
 | 
|---|
| 2794 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2795 | The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
 | 
|---|
| 2796 | describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
 | 
|---|
| 2797 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2798 | The most common input section description is to include all input
 | 
|---|
| 2799 | sections with a particular name in the output section.  For example, to
 | 
|---|
| 2800 | include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
 | 
|---|
| 2801 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2802 | *(.text)
 | 
|---|
| 2803 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2804 | @noindent
 | 
|---|
| 2805 | Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name.  To exclude a list
 | 
|---|
| 2806 | of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
 | 
|---|
| 2807 | match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list.  For
 | 
|---|
| 2808 | example:
 | 
|---|
| 2809 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2810 | (*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors))
 | 
|---|
| 2811 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2812 | will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
 | 
|---|
| 2813 | @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
 | 
|---|
| 2814 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2815 | There are two ways to include more than one section:
 | 
|---|
| 2816 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2817 | *(.text .rdata)
 | 
|---|
| 2818 | *(.text) *(.rdata)
 | 
|---|
| 2819 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2820 | @noindent
 | 
|---|
| 2821 | The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
 | 
|---|
| 2822 | @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section.  In the
 | 
|---|
| 2823 | first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
 | 
|---|
| 2824 | they are found in the linker input.  In the second example, all
 | 
|---|
| 2825 | @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
 | 
|---|
| 2826 | @samp{.rdata} input sections.
 | 
|---|
| 2827 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2828 | You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
 | 
|---|
| 2829 | You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
 | 
|---|
| 2830 | needs to be at a particular location in memory.  For example:
 | 
|---|
| 2831 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2832 | data.o(.data)
 | 
|---|
| 2833 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2834 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2835 | If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
 | 
|---|
| 2836 | the input file will be included in the output section.  This is not
 | 
|---|
| 2837 | commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion.  For example:
 | 
|---|
| 2838 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2839 | data.o
 | 
|---|
| 2840 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2841 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2842 | When you use a file name which does not contain any wild card
 | 
|---|
| 2843 | characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
 | 
|---|
| 2844 | name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command.  If you
 | 
|---|
| 2845 | did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
 | 
|---|
| 2846 | though it appeared on the command line.  Note that this differs from an
 | 
|---|
| 2847 | @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
 | 
|---|
| 2848 | the archive search path.
 | 
|---|
| 2849 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2850 | @node Input Section Wildcards
 | 
|---|
| 2851 | @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
 | 
|---|
| 2852 | @cindex input section wildcards
 | 
|---|
| 2853 | @cindex wildcard file name patterns
 | 
|---|
| 2854 | @cindex file name wildcard patterns
 | 
|---|
| 2855 | @cindex section name wildcard patterns
 | 
|---|
| 2856 | In an input section description, either the file name or the section
 | 
|---|
| 2857 | name or both may be wildcard patterns.
 | 
|---|
| 2858 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2859 | The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
 | 
|---|
| 2860 | pattern for the file name.
 | 
|---|
| 2861 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2862 | The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
 | 
|---|
| 2863 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2864 | @table @samp
 | 
|---|
| 2865 | @item *
 | 
|---|
| 2866 | matches any number of characters
 | 
|---|
| 2867 | @item ?
 | 
|---|
| 2868 | matches any single character
 | 
|---|
| 2869 | @item [@var{chars}]
 | 
|---|
| 2870 | matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
 | 
|---|
| 2871 | character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
 | 
|---|
| 2872 | @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
 | 
|---|
| 2873 | @item \
 | 
|---|
| 2874 | quotes the following character
 | 
|---|
| 2875 | @end table
 | 
|---|
| 2876 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2877 | When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
 | 
|---|
| 2878 | will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
 | 
|---|
| 2879 | Unix).  A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
 | 
|---|
| 2880 | exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
 | 
|---|
| 2881 | @samp{/} or not.  In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
 | 
|---|
| 2882 | a @samp{/} character.
 | 
|---|
| 2883 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2884 | File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
 | 
|---|
| 2885 | specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command.  The linker
 | 
|---|
| 2886 | does not search directories to expand wildcards.
 | 
|---|
| 2887 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2888 | If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
 | 
|---|
| 2889 | appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
 | 
|---|
| 2890 | will use the first match in the linker script.  For example, this
 | 
|---|
| 2891 | sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
 | 
|---|
| 2892 | @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
 | 
|---|
| 2893 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2894 | .data : @{ *(.data) @}
 | 
|---|
| 2895 | .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
 | 
|---|
| 2896 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2897 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2898 | @cindex SORT
 | 
|---|
| 2899 | Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
 | 
|---|
| 2900 | in the order in which they are seen during the link.  You can change
 | 
|---|
| 2901 | this by using the @code{SORT} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
 | 
|---|
| 2902 | pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT(.text*)}).  When the
 | 
|---|
| 2903 | @code{SORT} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
 | 
|---|
| 2904 | into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
 | 
|---|
| 2905 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2906 | If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
 | 
|---|
| 2907 | @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file.  The map file shows
 | 
|---|
| 2908 | precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
 | 
|---|
| 2909 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2910 | This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
 | 
|---|
| 2911 | files.  This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
 | 
|---|
| 2912 | sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
 | 
|---|
| 2913 | The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
 | 
|---|
| 2914 | with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
 | 
|---|
| 2915 | linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
 | 
|---|
| 2916 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2917 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 2918 | SECTIONS @{
 | 
|---|
| 2919 |   .text : @{ *(.text) @}
 | 
|---|
| 2920 |   .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
 | 
|---|
| 2921 |   .data : @{ *(.data) @}
 | 
|---|
| 2922 |   .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
 | 
|---|
| 2923 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 2924 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 2925 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2926 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2927 | @node Input Section Common
 | 
|---|
| 2928 | @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
 | 
|---|
| 2929 | @cindex common symbol placement
 | 
|---|
| 2930 | @cindex uninitialized data placement
 | 
|---|
| 2931 | A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
 | 
|---|
| 2932 | file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section.  The
 | 
|---|
| 2933 | linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
 | 
|---|
| 2934 | named @samp{COMMON}.
 | 
|---|
| 2935 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2936 | You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
 | 
|---|
| 2937 | other input sections.  You can use this to place common symbols from a
 | 
|---|
| 2938 | particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
 | 
|---|
| 2939 | input files are placed in another section.
 | 
|---|
| 2940 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2941 | In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
 | 
|---|
| 2942 | @samp{.bss} section in the output file.  For example:
 | 
|---|
| 2943 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2944 | .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
 | 
|---|
| 2945 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2946 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2947 | @cindex scommon section
 | 
|---|
| 2948 | @cindex small common symbols
 | 
|---|
| 2949 | Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol.  For
 | 
|---|
| 2950 | example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
 | 
|---|
| 2951 | symbols and small common symbols.  In this case, the linker will use a
 | 
|---|
| 2952 | different special section name for other types of common symbols.  In
 | 
|---|
| 2953 | the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
 | 
|---|
| 2954 | symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols.  This permits you
 | 
|---|
| 2955 | to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
 | 
|---|
| 2956 | locations.
 | 
|---|
| 2957 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2958 | @cindex [COMMON]
 | 
|---|
| 2959 | You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts.  This
 | 
|---|
| 2960 | notation is now considered obsolete.  It is equivalent to
 | 
|---|
| 2961 | @samp{*(COMMON)}.
 | 
|---|
| 2962 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2963 | @node Input Section Keep
 | 
|---|
| 2964 | @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
 | 
|---|
| 2965 | @cindex KEEP
 | 
|---|
| 2966 | @cindex garbage collection
 | 
|---|
| 2967 | When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
 | 
|---|
| 2968 | it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
 | 
|---|
| 2969 | This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
 | 
|---|
| 2970 | with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
 | 
|---|
| 2971 | @code{KEEP(SORT(*)(.ctors))}.
 | 
|---|
| 2972 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2973 | @node Input Section Example
 | 
|---|
| 2974 | @subsubsection Input Section Example
 | 
|---|
| 2975 | The following example is a complete linker script.  It tells the linker
 | 
|---|
| 2976 | to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
 | 
|---|
| 2977 | start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
 | 
|---|
| 2978 | @samp{0x10000}.  All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
 | 
|---|
| 2979 | follows immediately, in the same output section.  All of section
 | 
|---|
| 2980 | @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
 | 
|---|
| 2981 | @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
 | 
|---|
| 2982 | All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
 | 
|---|
| 2983 | files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
 | 
|---|
| 2984 | 
 | 
|---|
| 2985 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 2986 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 2987 | SECTIONS @{
 | 
|---|
| 2988 |   outputa 0x10000 :
 | 
|---|
| 2989 |     @{
 | 
|---|
| 2990 |     all.o
 | 
|---|
| 2991 |     foo.o (.input1)
 | 
|---|
| 2992 |     @}
 | 
|---|
| 2993 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 2994 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 2995 |   outputb :
 | 
|---|
| 2996 |     @{
 | 
|---|
| 2997 |     foo.o (.input2)
 | 
|---|
| 2998 |     foo1.o (.input1)
 | 
|---|
| 2999 |     @}
 | 
|---|
| 3000 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 3001 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 3002 |   outputc :
 | 
|---|
| 3003 |     @{
 | 
|---|
| 3004 |     *(.input1)
 | 
|---|
| 3005 |     *(.input2)
 | 
|---|
| 3006 |     @}
 | 
|---|
| 3007 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 3008 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 3009 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3010 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3011 | @node Output Section Data
 | 
|---|
| 3012 | @subsection Output Section Data
 | 
|---|
| 3013 | @cindex data
 | 
|---|
| 3014 | @cindex section data
 | 
|---|
| 3015 | @cindex output section data
 | 
|---|
| 3016 | @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
 | 
|---|
| 3017 | @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
 | 
|---|
| 3018 | @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
 | 
|---|
| 3019 | @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
 | 
|---|
| 3020 | @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
 | 
|---|
| 3021 | You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
 | 
|---|
| 3022 | @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
 | 
|---|
| 3023 | an output section command.  Each keyword is followed by an expression in
 | 
|---|
| 3024 | parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}).  The
 | 
|---|
| 3025 | value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
 | 
|---|
| 3026 | counter.
 | 
|---|
| 3027 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3028 | The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
 | 
|---|
| 3029 | store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively).  After storing the
 | 
|---|
| 3030 | bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
 | 
|---|
| 3031 | stored.
 | 
|---|
| 3032 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3033 | For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
 | 
|---|
| 3034 | of the symbol @samp{addr}:
 | 
|---|
| 3035 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3036 | BYTE(1)
 | 
|---|
| 3037 | LONG(addr)
 | 
|---|
| 3038 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3039 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3040 | When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
 | 
|---|
| 3041 | same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value.  When both host and
 | 
|---|
| 3042 | target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits.  In this case
 | 
|---|
| 3043 | @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
 | 
|---|
| 3044 | @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
 | 
|---|
| 3045 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3046 | If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
 | 
|---|
| 3047 | which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
 | 
|---|
| 3048 | When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
 | 
|---|
| 3049 | true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
 | 
|---|
| 3050 | endianness of the first input object file.
 | 
|---|
| 3051 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3052 | Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
 | 
|---|
| 3053 | between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
 | 
|---|
| 3054 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3055 | SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
 | 
|---|
| 3056 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3057 | whereas this will work:
 | 
|---|
| 3058 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3059 | SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
 | 
|---|
| 3060 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3061 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3062 | @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
 | 
|---|
| 3063 | @cindex holes, filling
 | 
|---|
| 3064 | @cindex unspecified memory
 | 
|---|
| 3065 | You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
 | 
|---|
| 3066 | current section.  It is followed by an expression in parentheses.  Any
 | 
|---|
| 3067 | otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
 | 
|---|
| 3068 | gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
 | 
|---|
| 3069 | with the value of the expression, repeated as
 | 
|---|
| 3070 | necessary.  A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
 | 
|---|
| 3071 | point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
 | 
|---|
| 3072 | than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
 | 
|---|
| 3073 | different parts of an output section.
 | 
|---|
| 3074 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3075 | This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
 | 
|---|
| 3076 | value @samp{0x90}:
 | 
|---|
| 3077 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3078 | FILL(0x90909090)
 | 
|---|
| 3079 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3080 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3081 | The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
 | 
|---|
| 3082 | section attribute, but it only affects the
 | 
|---|
| 3083 | part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
 | 
|---|
| 3084 | entire section.  If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
 | 
|---|
| 3085 | precedence.  @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
 | 
|---|
| 3086 | expression.
 | 
|---|
| 3087 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3088 | @node Output Section Keywords
 | 
|---|
| 3089 | @subsection Output Section Keywords
 | 
|---|
| 3090 | There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
 | 
|---|
| 3091 | commands.
 | 
|---|
| 3092 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3093 | @table @code
 | 
|---|
| 3094 | @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
 | 
|---|
| 3095 | @cindex input filename symbols
 | 
|---|
| 3096 | @cindex filename symbols
 | 
|---|
| 3097 | @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
 | 
|---|
| 3098 | The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
 | 
|---|
| 3099 | The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
 | 
|---|
| 3100 | file.  The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
 | 
|---|
| 3101 | the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
 | 
|---|
| 3102 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3103 | This is conventional for the a.out object file format.  It is not
 | 
|---|
| 3104 | normally used for any other object file format.
 | 
|---|
| 3105 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3106 | @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
 | 
|---|
| 3107 | @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
 | 
|---|
| 3108 | @cindex constructors, arranging in link
 | 
|---|
| 3109 | @item CONSTRUCTORS
 | 
|---|
| 3110 | When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
 | 
|---|
| 3111 | unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
 | 
|---|
| 3112 | destructors.  When linking object file formats which do not support
 | 
|---|
| 3113 | arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
 | 
|---|
| 3114 | automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
 | 
|---|
| 3115 | For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
 | 
|---|
| 3116 | linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
 | 
|---|
| 3117 | @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears.  The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
 | 
|---|
| 3118 | ignored for other object file formats.
 | 
|---|
| 3119 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3120 | The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
 | 
|---|
| 3121 | constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST}} marks the end.  The
 | 
|---|
| 3122 | first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
 | 
|---|
| 3123 | of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word.  The
 | 
|---|
| 3124 | compiler must arrange to actually run the code.  For these object file
 | 
|---|
| 3125 | formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
 | 
|---|
| 3126 | @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
 | 
|---|
| 3127 | the startup code for @code{main}.  @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
 | 
|---|
| 3128 | destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
 | 
|---|
| 3129 | @code{exit}.
 | 
|---|
| 3130 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3131 | For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
 | 
|---|
| 3132 | arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
 | 
|---|
| 3133 | addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
 | 
|---|
| 3134 | and @code{.dtors} sections.  Placing the following sequence into your
 | 
|---|
| 3135 | linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
 | 
|---|
| 3136 | runtime code expects to see.
 | 
|---|
| 3137 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3138 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3139 |       __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
 | 
|---|
| 3140 |       LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
 | 
|---|
| 3141 |       *(.ctors)
 | 
|---|
| 3142 |       LONG(0)
 | 
|---|
| 3143 |       __CTOR_END__ = .;
 | 
|---|
| 3144 |       __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
 | 
|---|
| 3145 |       LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
 | 
|---|
| 3146 |       *(.dtors)
 | 
|---|
| 3147 |       LONG(0)
 | 
|---|
| 3148 |       __DTOR_END__ = .;
 | 
|---|
| 3149 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3150 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3151 | If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
 | 
|---|
| 3152 | which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
 | 
|---|
| 3153 | are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
 | 
|---|
| 3154 | are executed in the correct order.  When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
 | 
|---|
| 3155 | command, use @samp{SORT(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead.  When using the
 | 
|---|
| 3156 | @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT(.ctors))} and
 | 
|---|
| 3157 | @samp{*(SORT(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
 | 
|---|
| 3158 | @samp{*(.dtors)}.
 | 
|---|
| 3159 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3160 | Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
 | 
|---|
| 3161 | and you will not need to concern yourself with them.  However, you may
 | 
|---|
| 3162 | need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
 | 
|---|
| 3163 | scripts.
 | 
|---|
| 3164 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3165 | @end table
 | 
|---|
| 3166 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3167 | @node Output Section Discarding
 | 
|---|
| 3168 | @subsection Output Section Discarding
 | 
|---|
| 3169 | @cindex discarding sections
 | 
|---|
| 3170 | @cindex sections, discarding
 | 
|---|
| 3171 | @cindex removing sections
 | 
|---|
| 3172 | The linker will not create output section which do not have any
 | 
|---|
| 3173 | contents.  This is for convenience when referring to input sections that
 | 
|---|
| 3174 | may or may not be present in any of the input files.  For example:
 | 
|---|
| 3175 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3176 | .foo @{ *(.foo) @}
 | 
|---|
| 3177 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3178 | @noindent
 | 
|---|
| 3179 | will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
 | 
|---|
| 3180 | @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file.
 | 
|---|
| 3181 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3182 | If you use anything other than an input section description as an output
 | 
|---|
| 3183 | section command, such as a symbol assignment, then the output section
 | 
|---|
| 3184 | will always be created, even if there are no matching input sections.
 | 
|---|
| 3185 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3186 | @cindex /DISCARD/
 | 
|---|
| 3187 | The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
 | 
|---|
| 3188 | input sections.  Any input sections which are assigned to an output
 | 
|---|
| 3189 | section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
 | 
|---|
| 3190 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3191 | @node Output Section Attributes
 | 
|---|
| 3192 | @subsection Output Section Attributes
 | 
|---|
| 3193 | @cindex output section attributes
 | 
|---|
| 3194 | We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
 | 
|---|
| 3195 | like this:
 | 
|---|
| 3196 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3197 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 3198 | @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] : [AT(@var{lma})]
 | 
|---|
| 3199 |   @{
 | 
|---|
| 3200 |     @var{output-section-command}
 | 
|---|
| 3201 |     @var{output-section-command}
 | 
|---|
| 3202 |     @dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 3203 |   @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
 | 
|---|
| 3204 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 3205 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3206 | We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
 | 
|---|
| 3207 | @var{output-section-command}.  In this section we will describe the
 | 
|---|
| 3208 | remaining section attributes.
 | 
|---|
| 3209 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3210 | @menu
 | 
|---|
| 3211 | * Output Section Type::         Output section type
 | 
|---|
| 3212 | * Output Section LMA::          Output section LMA
 | 
|---|
| 3213 | * Output Section Region::       Output section region
 | 
|---|
| 3214 | * Output Section Phdr::         Output section phdr
 | 
|---|
| 3215 | * Output Section Fill::         Output section fill
 | 
|---|
| 3216 | @end menu
 | 
|---|
| 3217 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3218 | @node Output Section Type
 | 
|---|
| 3219 | @subsubsection Output Section Type
 | 
|---|
| 3220 | Each output section may have a type.  The type is a keyword in
 | 
|---|
| 3221 | parentheses.  The following types are defined:
 | 
|---|
| 3222 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3223 | @table @code
 | 
|---|
| 3224 | @item NOLOAD
 | 
|---|
| 3225 | The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
 | 
|---|
| 3226 | loaded into memory when the program is run.
 | 
|---|
| 3227 | @item DSECT
 | 
|---|
| 3228 | @itemx COPY
 | 
|---|
| 3229 | @itemx INFO
 | 
|---|
| 3230 | @itemx OVERLAY
 | 
|---|
| 3231 | These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
 | 
|---|
| 3232 | rarely used.  They all have the same effect: the section should be
 | 
|---|
| 3233 | marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
 | 
|---|
| 3234 | section when the program is run.
 | 
|---|
| 3235 | @end table
 | 
|---|
| 3236 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3237 | @kindex NOLOAD
 | 
|---|
| 3238 | @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
 | 
|---|
| 3239 | @cindex loading, preventing
 | 
|---|
| 3240 | The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
 | 
|---|
| 3241 | the input sections which map into it.  You can override this by using
 | 
|---|
| 3242 | the section type.  For example, in the script sample below, the
 | 
|---|
| 3243 | @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
 | 
|---|
| 3244 | need to be loaded when the program is run.  The contents of the
 | 
|---|
| 3245 | @samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
 | 
|---|
| 3246 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3247 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 3248 | SECTIONS @{
 | 
|---|
| 3249 |   ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
 | 
|---|
| 3250 |   @dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 3251 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 3252 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 3253 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3254 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3255 | @node Output Section LMA
 | 
|---|
| 3256 | @subsubsection Output Section LMA
 | 
|---|
| 3257 | @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
 | 
|---|
| 3258 | @kindex AT(@var{lma})
 | 
|---|
| 3259 | @cindex load address
 | 
|---|
| 3260 | @cindex section load address
 | 
|---|
| 3261 | Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
 | 
|---|
| 3262 | @ref{Basic Script Concepts}.  The address expression which may appear in
 | 
|---|
| 3263 | an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
 | 
|---|
| 3264 | Address}).
 | 
|---|
| 3265 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3266 | The linker will normally set the LMA equal to the VMA.  You can change
 | 
|---|
| 3267 | that by using the @code{AT} keyword.  The expression @var{lma} that
 | 
|---|
| 3268 | follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies the load address of the
 | 
|---|
| 3269 | section.  Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression,
 | 
|---|
| 3270 | you may specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
 | 
|---|
| 3271 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3272 | @cindex ROM initialized data
 | 
|---|
| 3273 | @cindex initialized data in ROM
 | 
|---|
| 3274 | This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image.  For
 | 
|---|
| 3275 | example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
 | 
|---|
| 3276 | called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
 | 
|---|
| 3277 | @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
 | 
|---|
| 3278 | even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
 | 
|---|
| 3279 | uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}.  The symbol @code{_data} is
 | 
|---|
| 3280 | defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
 | 
|---|
| 3281 | counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
 | 
|---|
| 3282 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3283 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3284 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 3285 | SECTIONS
 | 
|---|
| 3286 |   @{
 | 
|---|
| 3287 |   .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
 | 
|---|
| 3288 |   .mdata 0x2000 :
 | 
|---|
| 3289 |     AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
 | 
|---|
| 3290 |     @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ;  @}
 | 
|---|
| 3291 |   .bss 0x3000 :
 | 
|---|
| 3292 |     @{ _bstart = . ;  *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
 | 
|---|
| 3293 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 3294 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 3295 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3296 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3297 | The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
 | 
|---|
| 3298 | this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
 | 
|---|
| 3299 | the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address.  Notice
 | 
|---|
| 3300 | how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
 | 
|---|
| 3301 | script.
 | 
|---|
| 3302 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3303 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3304 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 3305 | extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
 | 
|---|
| 3306 | char *src = &_etext;
 | 
|---|
| 3307 | char *dst = &_data;
 | 
|---|
| 3308 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3309 | /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
 | 
|---|
| 3310 | while (dst < &_edata) @{
 | 
|---|
| 3311 |   *dst++ = *src++;
 | 
|---|
| 3312 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 3313 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3314 | /* Zero bss */
 | 
|---|
| 3315 | for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
 | 
|---|
| 3316 |   *dst = 0;
 | 
|---|
| 3317 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 3318 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3319 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3320 | @node Output Section Region
 | 
|---|
| 3321 | @subsubsection Output Section Region
 | 
|---|
| 3322 | @kindex >@var{region}
 | 
|---|
| 3323 | @cindex section, assigning to memory region
 | 
|---|
| 3324 | @cindex memory regions and sections
 | 
|---|
| 3325 | You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
 | 
|---|
| 3326 | using @samp{>@var{region}}.  @xref{MEMORY}.
 | 
|---|
| 3327 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3328 | Here is a simple example:
 | 
|---|
| 3329 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3330 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 3331 | MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
 | 
|---|
| 3332 | SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
 | 
|---|
| 3333 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 3334 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3335 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3336 | @node Output Section Phdr
 | 
|---|
| 3337 | @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
 | 
|---|
| 3338 | @kindex :@var{phdr}
 | 
|---|
| 3339 | @cindex section, assigning to program header
 | 
|---|
| 3340 | @cindex program headers and sections
 | 
|---|
| 3341 | You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
 | 
|---|
| 3342 | using @samp{:@var{phdr}}.  @xref{PHDRS}.  If a section is assigned to
 | 
|---|
| 3343 | one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
 | 
|---|
| 3344 | assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
 | 
|---|
| 3345 | @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier.  You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
 | 
|---|
| 3346 | linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
 | 
|---|
| 3347 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3348 | Here is a simple example:
 | 
|---|
| 3349 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3350 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 3351 | PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
 | 
|---|
| 3352 | SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
 | 
|---|
| 3353 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 3354 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3355 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3356 | @node Output Section Fill
 | 
|---|
| 3357 | @subsubsection Output Section Fill
 | 
|---|
| 3358 | @kindex =@var{fillexp}
 | 
|---|
| 3359 | @cindex section fill pattern
 | 
|---|
| 3360 | @cindex fill pattern, entire section
 | 
|---|
| 3361 | You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
 | 
|---|
| 3362 | @samp{=@var{fillexp}}.  @var{fillexp} is an expression
 | 
|---|
| 3363 | (@pxref{Expressions}).  Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
 | 
|---|
| 3364 | within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
 | 
|---|
| 3365 | alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
 | 
|---|
| 3366 | necessary.  If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
 | 
|---|
| 3367 | of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
 | 
|---|
| 3368 | an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
 | 
|---|
| 3369 | fill pattern;  Leading zeros become part of the pattern too.  For all
 | 
|---|
| 3370 | other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
 | 
|---|
| 3371 | pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
 | 
|---|
| 3372 | expression.  In all cases, the number is big-endian.
 | 
|---|
| 3373 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3374 | You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
 | 
|---|
| 3375 | output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
 | 
|---|
| 3376 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3377 | Here is a simple example:
 | 
|---|
| 3378 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3379 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 3380 | SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
 | 
|---|
| 3381 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 3382 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3383 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3384 | @node Overlay Description
 | 
|---|
| 3385 | @subsection Overlay Description
 | 
|---|
| 3386 | @kindex OVERLAY
 | 
|---|
| 3387 | @cindex overlays
 | 
|---|
| 3388 | An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
 | 
|---|
| 3389 | are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
 | 
|---|
| 3390 | the same memory address.  At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
 | 
|---|
| 3391 | copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
 | 
|---|
| 3392 | required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits.  This approach
 | 
|---|
| 3393 | can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
 | 
|---|
| 3394 | than another.
 | 
|---|
| 3395 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3396 | Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command.  The
 | 
|---|
| 3397 | @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
 | 
|---|
| 3398 | output section description.  The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
 | 
|---|
| 3399 | command is as follows:
 | 
|---|
| 3400 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3401 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 3402 | OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
 | 
|---|
| 3403 |   @{
 | 
|---|
| 3404 |     @var{secname1}
 | 
|---|
| 3405 |       @{
 | 
|---|
| 3406 |         @var{output-section-command}
 | 
|---|
| 3407 |         @var{output-section-command}
 | 
|---|
| 3408 |         @dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 3409 |       @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
 | 
|---|
| 3410 |     @var{secname2}
 | 
|---|
| 3411 |       @{
 | 
|---|
| 3412 |         @var{output-section-command}
 | 
|---|
| 3413 |         @var{output-section-command}
 | 
|---|
| 3414 |         @dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 3415 |       @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
 | 
|---|
| 3416 |     @dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 3417 |   @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
 | 
|---|
| 3418 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 3419 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3420 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3421 | Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
 | 
|---|
| 3422 | section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above).  The
 | 
|---|
| 3423 | section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
 | 
|---|
| 3424 | those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
 | 
|---|
| 3425 | except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
 | 
|---|
| 3426 | sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
 | 
|---|
| 3427 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3428 | The sections are all defined with the same starting address.  The load
 | 
|---|
| 3429 | addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
 | 
|---|
| 3430 | memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
 | 
|---|
| 3431 | whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
 | 
|---|
| 3432 | and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
 | 
|---|
| 3433 | and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
 | 
|---|
| 3434 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3435 | If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
 | 
|---|
| 3436 | among the sections, the linker will report an error.  Since the sections
 | 
|---|
| 3437 | all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
 | 
|---|
| 3438 | section to refer directly to another.  @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
 | 
|---|
| 3439 | NOCROSSREFS}.
 | 
|---|
| 3440 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3441 | For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
 | 
|---|
| 3442 | defines two symbols.  The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
 | 
|---|
| 3443 | defined as the starting load address of the section.  The symbol
 | 
|---|
| 3444 | @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
 | 
|---|
| 3445 | the section.  Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
 | 
|---|
| 3446 | within C identifiers are removed.  C (or assembler) code may use these
 | 
|---|
| 3447 | symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
 | 
|---|
| 3448 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3449 | At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
 | 
|---|
| 3450 | the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
 | 
|---|
| 3451 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3452 | Here is an example.  Remember that this would appear inside a
 | 
|---|
| 3453 | @code{SECTIONS} construct.
 | 
|---|
| 3454 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3455 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 3456 |   OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
 | 
|---|
| 3457 |    @{
 | 
|---|
| 3458 |      .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
 | 
|---|
| 3459 |      .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
 | 
|---|
| 3460 |    @}
 | 
|---|
| 3461 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 3462 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3463 | @noindent
 | 
|---|
| 3464 | This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
 | 
|---|
| 3465 | address 0x1000.  @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
 | 
|---|
| 3466 | @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}.  The
 | 
|---|
| 3467 | following symbols will be defined: @code{__load_start_text0},
 | 
|---|
| 3468 | @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
 | 
|---|
| 3469 | @code{__load_stop_text1}.
 | 
|---|
| 3470 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3471 | C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
 | 
|---|
| 3472 | like the following.
 | 
|---|
| 3473 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3474 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3475 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 3476 |   extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
 | 
|---|
| 3477 |   memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
 | 
|---|
| 3478 |           &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
 | 
|---|
| 3479 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 3480 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3481 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3482 | Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
 | 
|---|
| 3483 | everything it does can be done using the more basic commands.  The above
 | 
|---|
| 3484 | example could have been written identically as follows.
 | 
|---|
| 3485 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3486 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3487 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 3488 |   .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
 | 
|---|
| 3489 |   __load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0);
 | 
|---|
| 3490 |   __load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0);
 | 
|---|
| 3491 |   .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
 | 
|---|
| 3492 |   __load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1);
 | 
|---|
| 3493 |   __load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1);
 | 
|---|
| 3494 |   . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
 | 
|---|
| 3495 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 3496 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3497 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3498 | @node MEMORY
 | 
|---|
| 3499 | @section MEMORY Command
 | 
|---|
| 3500 | @kindex MEMORY
 | 
|---|
| 3501 | @cindex memory regions
 | 
|---|
| 3502 | @cindex regions of memory
 | 
|---|
| 3503 | @cindex allocating memory
 | 
|---|
| 3504 | @cindex discontinuous memory
 | 
|---|
| 3505 | The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
 | 
|---|
| 3506 | memory.  You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
 | 
|---|
| 3507 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3508 | The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
 | 
|---|
| 3509 | memory in the target.  You can use it to describe which memory regions
 | 
|---|
| 3510 | may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid.  You
 | 
|---|
| 3511 | can then assign sections to particular memory regions.  The linker will
 | 
|---|
| 3512 | set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
 | 
|---|
| 3513 | regions that become too full.  The linker will not shuffle sections
 | 
|---|
| 3514 | around to fit into the available regions.
 | 
|---|
| 3515 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3516 | A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
 | 
|---|
| 3517 | command.  However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
 | 
|---|
| 3518 | you wish.  The syntax is:
 | 
|---|
| 3519 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3520 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 3521 | MEMORY
 | 
|---|
| 3522 |   @{
 | 
|---|
| 3523 |     @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
 | 
|---|
| 3524 |     @dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 3525 |   @}
 | 
|---|
| 3526 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 3527 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3528 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3529 | The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
 | 
|---|
| 3530 | region.  The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
 | 
|---|
| 3531 | Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
 | 
|---|
| 3532 | with symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each memory region
 | 
|---|
| 3533 | must have a distinct name.
 | 
|---|
| 3534 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3535 | @cindex memory region attributes
 | 
|---|
| 3536 | The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
 | 
|---|
| 3537 | whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
 | 
|---|
| 3538 | not explicitly mapped in the linker script.  As described in
 | 
|---|
| 3539 | @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
 | 
|---|
| 3540 | section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
 | 
|---|
| 3541 | the input section.  If you define region attributes, the linker will use
 | 
|---|
| 3542 | them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
 | 
|---|
| 3543 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3544 | The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
 | 
|---|
| 3545 | @table @samp
 | 
|---|
| 3546 | @item R
 | 
|---|
| 3547 | Read-only section
 | 
|---|
| 3548 | @item W
 | 
|---|
| 3549 | Read/write section
 | 
|---|
| 3550 | @item X
 | 
|---|
| 3551 | Executable section
 | 
|---|
| 3552 | @item A
 | 
|---|
| 3553 | Allocatable section
 | 
|---|
| 3554 | @item I
 | 
|---|
| 3555 | Initialized section
 | 
|---|
| 3556 | @item L
 | 
|---|
| 3557 | Same as @samp{I}
 | 
|---|
| 3558 | @item !
 | 
|---|
| 3559 | Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
 | 
|---|
| 3560 | @end table
 | 
|---|
| 3561 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3562 | If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
 | 
|---|
| 3563 | @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region.  The @samp{!}
 | 
|---|
| 3564 | attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
 | 
|---|
| 3565 | in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
 | 
|---|
| 3566 | attributes.
 | 
|---|
| 3567 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3568 | @kindex ORIGIN =
 | 
|---|
| 3569 | @kindex o =
 | 
|---|
| 3570 | @kindex org =
 | 
|---|
| 3571 | The @var{origin} is an expression for the start address of the memory
 | 
|---|
| 3572 | region.  The expression must evaluate to a constant before memory
 | 
|---|
| 3573 | allocation is performed, which means that you may not use any section
 | 
|---|
| 3574 | relative symbols.  The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be abbreviated to
 | 
|---|
| 3575 | @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example, @code{ORG}).
 | 
|---|
| 3576 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3577 | @kindex LENGTH =
 | 
|---|
| 3578 | @kindex len =
 | 
|---|
| 3579 | @kindex l =
 | 
|---|
| 3580 | The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
 | 
|---|
| 3581 | region.  As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
 | 
|---|
| 3582 | evaluate to a constant before memory allocation is performed.  The
 | 
|---|
| 3583 | keyword @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
 | 
|---|
| 3584 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3585 | In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
 | 
|---|
| 3586 | available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
 | 
|---|
| 3587 | and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes.  The
 | 
|---|
| 3588 | linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
 | 
|---|
| 3589 | is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
 | 
|---|
| 3590 | or executable.  The linker will place other sections which are not
 | 
|---|
| 3591 | explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
 | 
|---|
| 3592 | region.
 | 
|---|
| 3593 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3594 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3595 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 3596 | MEMORY
 | 
|---|
| 3597 |   @{
 | 
|---|
| 3598 |     rom (rx)  : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
 | 
|---|
| 3599 |     ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
 | 
|---|
| 3600 |   @}
 | 
|---|
| 3601 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 3602 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3603 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3604 | Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
 | 
|---|
| 3605 | specific output sections into that memory region by using the
 | 
|---|
| 3606 | @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute.  For example, if you have
 | 
|---|
| 3607 | a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
 | 
|---|
| 3608 | output section definition.  @xref{Output Section Region}.  If no address
 | 
|---|
| 3609 | was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
 | 
|---|
| 3610 | the next available address within the memory region.  If the combined
 | 
|---|
| 3611 | output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
 | 
|---|
| 3612 | region, the linker will issue an error message.
 | 
|---|
| 3613 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3614 | @node PHDRS
 | 
|---|
| 3615 | @section PHDRS Command
 | 
|---|
| 3616 | @kindex PHDRS
 | 
|---|
| 3617 | @cindex program headers
 | 
|---|
| 3618 | @cindex ELF program headers
 | 
|---|
| 3619 | @cindex program segments
 | 
|---|
| 3620 | @cindex segments, ELF
 | 
|---|
| 3621 | The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
 | 
|---|
| 3622 | @dfn{segments}.  The program headers describe how the program should be
 | 
|---|
| 3623 | loaded into memory.  You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
 | 
|---|
| 3624 | program with the @samp{-p} option.
 | 
|---|
| 3625 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3626 | When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
 | 
|---|
| 3627 | reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
 | 
|---|
| 3628 | program.  This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
 | 
|---|
| 3629 | This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
 | 
|---|
| 3630 | interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
 | 
|---|
| 3631 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3632 | The linker will create reasonable program headers by default.  However,
 | 
|---|
| 3633 | in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
 | 
|---|
| 3634 | precisely.  You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose.  When
 | 
|---|
| 3635 | the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
 | 
|---|
| 3636 | not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
 | 
|---|
| 3637 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3638 | The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
 | 
|---|
| 3639 | generating an ELF output file.  In other cases, the linker will simply
 | 
|---|
| 3640 | ignore @code{PHDRS}.
 | 
|---|
| 3641 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3642 | This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command.  The words @code{PHDRS},
 | 
|---|
| 3643 | @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
 | 
|---|
| 3644 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3645 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3646 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 3647 | PHDRS
 | 
|---|
| 3648 | @{
 | 
|---|
| 3649 |   @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
 | 
|---|
| 3650 |         [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
 | 
|---|
| 3651 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 3652 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 3653 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3654 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3655 | The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
 | 
|---|
| 3656 | of the linker script.  It is not put into the output file.  Program
 | 
|---|
| 3657 | header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
 | 
|---|
| 3658 | with symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each program header
 | 
|---|
| 3659 | must have a distinct name.
 | 
|---|
| 3660 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3661 | Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
 | 
|---|
| 3662 | system loader will load from the file.  In the linker script, you
 | 
|---|
| 3663 | specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
 | 
|---|
| 3664 | sections in the segments.  You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
 | 
|---|
| 3665 | attribute to place a section in a particular segment.  @xref{Output
 | 
|---|
| 3666 | Section Phdr}.
 | 
|---|
| 3667 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3668 | It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment.  This
 | 
|---|
| 3669 | merely implies that one segment of memory contains another.  You may
 | 
|---|
| 3670 | repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
 | 
|---|
| 3671 | contain the section.
 | 
|---|
| 3672 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3673 | If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
 | 
|---|
| 3674 | then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
 | 
|---|
| 3675 | not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments.  This is for
 | 
|---|
| 3676 | convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
 | 
|---|
| 3677 | placed in a single segment.  You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
 | 
|---|
| 3678 | default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
 | 
|---|
| 3679 | segment at all.
 | 
|---|
| 3680 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3681 | @kindex FILEHDR
 | 
|---|
| 3682 | @kindex PHDRS
 | 
|---|
| 3683 | You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
 | 
|---|
| 3684 | the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
 | 
|---|
| 3685 | The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
 | 
|---|
| 3686 | file header.  The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
 | 
|---|
| 3687 | include the ELF program headers themselves.
 | 
|---|
| 3688 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3689 | The @var{type} may be one of the following.  The numbers indicate the
 | 
|---|
| 3690 | value of the keyword.
 | 
|---|
| 3691 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3692 | @table @asis
 | 
|---|
| 3693 | @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
 | 
|---|
| 3694 | Indicates an unused program header.
 | 
|---|
| 3695 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3696 | @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
 | 
|---|
| 3697 | Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
 | 
|---|
| 3698 | the file.
 | 
|---|
| 3699 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3700 | @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
 | 
|---|
| 3701 | Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
 | 
|---|
| 3702 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3703 | @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
 | 
|---|
| 3704 | Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
 | 
|---|
| 3705 | found.
 | 
|---|
| 3706 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3707 | @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
 | 
|---|
| 3708 | Indicates a segment holding note information.
 | 
|---|
| 3709 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3710 | @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
 | 
|---|
| 3711 | A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
 | 
|---|
| 3712 | ABI.
 | 
|---|
| 3713 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3714 | @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
 | 
|---|
| 3715 | Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
 | 
|---|
| 3716 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3717 | @item @var{expression}
 | 
|---|
| 3718 | An expression giving the numeric type of the program header.  This may
 | 
|---|
| 3719 | be used for types not defined above.
 | 
|---|
| 3720 | @end table
 | 
|---|
| 3721 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3722 | You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
 | 
|---|
| 3723 | in memory by using an @code{AT} expression.  This is identical to the
 | 
|---|
| 3724 | @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
 | 
|---|
| 3725 | Section LMA}).  The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
 | 
|---|
| 3726 | output section attribute.
 | 
|---|
| 3727 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3728 | The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
 | 
|---|
| 3729 | which comprise the segment.  You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
 | 
|---|
| 3730 | explicitly specify the segment flags.  The value of @var{flags} must be
 | 
|---|
| 3731 | an integer.  It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
 | 
|---|
| 3732 | header.
 | 
|---|
| 3733 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3734 | Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}.  This shows a typical set of program
 | 
|---|
| 3735 | headers used on a native ELF system.
 | 
|---|
| 3736 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3737 | @example
 | 
|---|
| 3738 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 3739 | PHDRS
 | 
|---|
| 3740 | @{
 | 
|---|
| 3741 |   headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
 | 
|---|
| 3742 |   interp PT_INTERP ;
 | 
|---|
| 3743 |   text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
 | 
|---|
| 3744 |   data PT_LOAD ;
 | 
|---|
| 3745 |   dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
 | 
|---|
| 3746 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 3747 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3748 | SECTIONS
 | 
|---|
| 3749 | @{
 | 
|---|
| 3750 |   . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
 | 
|---|
| 3751 |   .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
 | 
|---|
| 3752 |   .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
 | 
|---|
| 3753 |   .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
 | 
|---|
| 3754 |   @dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 3755 |   . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
 | 
|---|
| 3756 |   .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
 | 
|---|
| 3757 |   .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
 | 
|---|
| 3758 |   @dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 3759 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 3760 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 3761 | @end example
 | 
|---|
| 3762 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3763 | @node VERSION
 | 
|---|
| 3764 | @section VERSION Command
 | 
|---|
| 3765 | @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
 | 
|---|
| 3766 | @cindex symbol versions
 | 
|---|
| 3767 | @cindex version script
 | 
|---|
| 3768 | @cindex versions of symbols
 | 
|---|
| 3769 | The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF.  Symbol versions are
 | 
|---|
| 3770 | only useful when using shared libraries.  The dynamic linker can use
 | 
|---|
| 3771 | symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
 | 
|---|
| 3772 | a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
 | 
|---|
| 3773 | shared library.
 | 
|---|
| 3774 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3775 | You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
 | 
|---|
| 3776 | you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script.  You can
 | 
|---|
| 3777 | also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
 | 
|---|
| 3778 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3779 | The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
 | 
|---|
| 3780 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3781 | VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
 | 
|---|
| 3782 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3783 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3784 | The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
 | 
|---|
| 3785 | Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5.  The version script defines a tree of
 | 
|---|
| 3786 | version nodes.  You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
 | 
|---|
| 3787 | version script.  You can specify which symbols are bound to which
 | 
|---|
| 3788 | version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
 | 
|---|
| 3789 | scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
 | 
|---|
| 3790 | library.
 | 
|---|
| 3791 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3792 | The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
 | 
|---|
| 3793 | examples.
 | 
|---|
| 3794 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3795 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3796 | VERS_1.1 @{
 | 
|---|
| 3797 |          global:
 | 
|---|
| 3798 |                  foo1;
 | 
|---|
| 3799 |          local:
 | 
|---|
| 3800 |                  old*;
 | 
|---|
| 3801 |                  original*;
 | 
|---|
| 3802 |                  new*;
 | 
|---|
| 3803 | @};
 | 
|---|
| 3804 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3805 | VERS_1.2 @{
 | 
|---|
| 3806 |                  foo2;
 | 
|---|
| 3807 | @} VERS_1.1;
 | 
|---|
| 3808 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3809 | VERS_2.0 @{
 | 
|---|
| 3810 |                  bar1; bar2;
 | 
|---|
| 3811 | @} VERS_1.2;
 | 
|---|
| 3812 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3813 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3814 | This example version script defines three version nodes.  The first
 | 
|---|
| 3815 | version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
 | 
|---|
| 3816 | The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}.  It reduces
 | 
|---|
| 3817 | a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
 | 
|---|
| 3818 | of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
 | 
|---|
| 3819 | symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
 | 
|---|
| 3820 | is matched.  The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
 | 
|---|
| 3821 | in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
 | 
|---|
| 3822 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3823 | Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}.  This node
 | 
|---|
| 3824 | depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}.  The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
 | 
|---|
| 3825 | to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
 | 
|---|
| 3826 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3827 | Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}.  This node
 | 
|---|
| 3828 | depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}.  The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
 | 
|---|
| 3829 | and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
 | 
|---|
| 3830 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3831 | When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
 | 
|---|
| 3832 | specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
 | 
|---|
| 3833 | unspecified base version of the library.  You can bind all otherwise
 | 
|---|
| 3834 | unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
 | 
|---|
| 3835 | somewhere in the version script.
 | 
|---|
| 3836 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3837 | The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
 | 
|---|
| 3838 | they might suggest to the person reading them.  The @samp{2.0} version
 | 
|---|
| 3839 | could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
 | 
|---|
| 3840 | However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
 | 
|---|
| 3841 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3842 | Node name can be omited, provided it is the only version node
 | 
|---|
| 3843 | in the version script.  Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
 | 
|---|
| 3844 | symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
 | 
|---|
| 3845 | won't.
 | 
|---|
| 3846 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3847 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3848 | @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
 | 
|---|
| 3849 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3850 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3851 | When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
 | 
|---|
| 3852 | symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
 | 
|---|
| 3853 | requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
 | 
|---|
| 3854 | shared library it is linked against.  Thus at runtime, the dynamic
 | 
|---|
| 3855 | loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
 | 
|---|
| 3856 | linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
 | 
|---|
| 3857 | application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols.  In this
 | 
|---|
| 3858 | way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
 | 
|---|
| 3859 | all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
 | 
|---|
| 3860 | search for each symbol reference.
 | 
|---|
| 3861 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3862 | The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
 | 
|---|
| 3863 | doing minor version checking that SunOS does.  The fundamental problem
 | 
|---|
| 3864 | that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
 | 
|---|
| 3865 | functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
 | 
|---|
| 3866 | the application starts up.  If a shared library is out of date, a
 | 
|---|
| 3867 | required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
 | 
|---|
| 3868 | that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail.  With symbol
 | 
|---|
| 3869 | versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
 | 
|---|
| 3870 | the libraries being used with the application are too old.
 | 
|---|
| 3871 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3872 | There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach.  The
 | 
|---|
| 3873 | first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
 | 
|---|
| 3874 | source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
 | 
|---|
| 3875 | script.  This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
 | 
|---|
| 3876 | maintainer.  You can do this by putting something like:
 | 
|---|
| 3877 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3878 | __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
 | 
|---|
| 3879 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3880 | @noindent
 | 
|---|
| 3881 | in the C source file.  This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
 | 
|---|
| 3882 | be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
 | 
|---|
| 3883 | The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
 | 
|---|
| 3884 | @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
 | 
|---|
| 3885 | takes precedence over a version script.
 | 
|---|
| 3886 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3887 | The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
 | 
|---|
| 3888 | function to appear in a given shared library.  In this way you can make
 | 
|---|
| 3889 | an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
 | 
|---|
| 3890 | version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
 | 
|---|
| 3891 | linked against the old interface to continue to function.
 | 
|---|
| 3892 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3893 | To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
 | 
|---|
| 3894 | source file.  Here is an example:
 | 
|---|
| 3895 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3896 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3897 | __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
 | 
|---|
| 3898 | __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
 | 
|---|
| 3899 | __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
 | 
|---|
| 3900 | __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
 | 
|---|
| 3901 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3902 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3903 | In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
 | 
|---|
| 3904 | unspecified base version of the symbol.  The source file that contains this
 | 
|---|
| 3905 | example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
 | 
|---|
| 3906 | @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
 | 
|---|
| 3907 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3908 | When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
 | 
|---|
| 3909 | some way to specify a default version to which external references to
 | 
|---|
| 3910 | this symbol will be bound.  You can do this with the
 | 
|---|
| 3911 | @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive.  You can only
 | 
|---|
| 3912 | declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
 | 
|---|
| 3913 | you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
 | 
|---|
| 3914 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3915 | If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
 | 
|---|
| 3916 | within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
 | 
|---|
| 3917 | (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
 | 
|---|
| 3918 | specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
 | 
|---|
| 3919 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3920 | You can also specify the language in the version script:
 | 
|---|
| 3921 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3922 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3923 | VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
 | 
|---|
| 3924 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3925 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3926 | The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}. 
 | 
|---|
| 3927 | The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
 | 
|---|
| 3928 | demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
 | 
|---|
| 3929 | patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
 | 
|---|
| 3930 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3931 | @node Expressions
 | 
|---|
| 3932 | @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
 | 
|---|
| 3933 | @cindex expressions
 | 
|---|
| 3934 | @cindex arithmetic
 | 
|---|
| 3935 | The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
 | 
|---|
| 3936 | that of C expressions.  All expressions are evaluated as integers.  All
 | 
|---|
| 3937 | expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
 | 
|---|
| 3938 | host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
 | 
|---|
| 3939 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3940 | You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
 | 
|---|
| 3941 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3942 | The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
 | 
|---|
| 3943 | expressions.
 | 
|---|
| 3944 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3945 | @menu
 | 
|---|
| 3946 | * Constants::                   Constants
 | 
|---|
| 3947 | * Symbols::                     Symbol Names
 | 
|---|
| 3948 | * Location Counter::            The Location Counter
 | 
|---|
| 3949 | * Operators::                   Operators
 | 
|---|
| 3950 | * Evaluation::                  Evaluation
 | 
|---|
| 3951 | * Expression Section::          The Section of an Expression
 | 
|---|
| 3952 | * Builtin Functions::           Builtin Functions
 | 
|---|
| 3953 | @end menu
 | 
|---|
| 3954 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3955 | @node Constants
 | 
|---|
| 3956 | @subsection Constants
 | 
|---|
| 3957 | @cindex integer notation
 | 
|---|
| 3958 | @cindex constants in linker scripts
 | 
|---|
| 3959 | All constants are integers.
 | 
|---|
| 3960 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3961 | As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
 | 
|---|
| 3962 | octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
 | 
|---|
| 3963 | hexadecimal.  The linker considers other integers to be decimal.
 | 
|---|
| 3964 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3965 | @cindex scaled integers
 | 
|---|
| 3966 | @cindex K and M integer suffixes
 | 
|---|
| 3967 | @cindex M and K integer suffixes
 | 
|---|
| 3968 | @cindex suffixes for integers
 | 
|---|
| 3969 | @cindex integer suffixes
 | 
|---|
| 3970 | In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
 | 
|---|
| 3971 | constant by
 | 
|---|
| 3972 | @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
 | 
|---|
| 3973 | @ifnottex
 | 
|---|
| 3974 | @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
 | 
|---|
| 3975 | @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
 | 
|---|
| 3976 | @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
 | 
|---|
| 3977 | @end ifnottex
 | 
|---|
| 3978 | @tex
 | 
|---|
| 3979 | ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
 | 
|---|
| 3980 | @end tex
 | 
|---|
| 3981 | @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
 | 
|---|
| 3982 | respectively. For example, the following all refer to the same quantity:
 | 
|---|
| 3983 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3984 | _fourk_1 = 4K;
 | 
|---|
| 3985 | _fourk_2 = 4096;
 | 
|---|
| 3986 | _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
 | 
|---|
| 3987 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 3988 | 
 | 
|---|
| 3989 | @node Symbols
 | 
|---|
| 3990 | @subsection Symbol Names
 | 
|---|
| 3991 | @cindex symbol names
 | 
|---|
| 3992 | @cindex names
 | 
|---|
| 3993 | @cindex quoted symbol names
 | 
|---|
| 3994 | @kindex "
 | 
|---|
| 3995 | Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
 | 
|---|
| 3996 | and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
 | 
|---|
| 3997 | Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords.  You can
 | 
|---|
| 3998 | specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
 | 
|---|
| 3999 | keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
 | 
|---|
| 4000 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4001 | "SECTION" = 9;
 | 
|---|
| 4002 | "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
 | 
|---|
| 4003 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4004 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4005 | Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
 | 
|---|
| 4006 | to delimit symbols with spaces.  For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
 | 
|---|
| 4007 | whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
 | 
|---|
| 4008 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4009 | @node Location Counter
 | 
|---|
| 4010 | @subsection The Location Counter
 | 
|---|
| 4011 | @kindex .
 | 
|---|
| 4012 | @cindex dot
 | 
|---|
| 4013 | @cindex location counter
 | 
|---|
| 4014 | @cindex current output location
 | 
|---|
| 4015 | The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
 | 
|---|
| 4016 | current output location counter.  Since the @code{.} always refers to a
 | 
|---|
| 4017 | location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
 | 
|---|
| 4018 | within a @code{SECTIONS} command.  The @code{.} symbol may appear
 | 
|---|
| 4019 | anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
 | 
|---|
| 4020 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4021 | @cindex holes
 | 
|---|
| 4022 | Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
 | 
|---|
| 4023 | moved.  This may be used to create holes in the output section.  The
 | 
|---|
| 4024 | location counter may never be moved backwards.
 | 
|---|
| 4025 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4026 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4027 | SECTIONS
 | 
|---|
| 4028 | @{
 | 
|---|
| 4029 |   output :
 | 
|---|
| 4030 |     @{
 | 
|---|
| 4031 |       file1(.text)
 | 
|---|
| 4032 |       . = . + 1000;
 | 
|---|
| 4033 |       file2(.text)
 | 
|---|
| 4034 |       . += 1000;
 | 
|---|
| 4035 |       file3(.text)
 | 
|---|
| 4036 |     @} = 0x12345678;
 | 
|---|
| 4037 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 4038 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4039 | @noindent
 | 
|---|
| 4040 | In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
 | 
|---|
| 4041 | located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}.  It is
 | 
|---|
| 4042 | followed by a 1000 byte gap.  Then the @samp{.text} section from
 | 
|---|
| 4043 | @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
 | 
|---|
| 4044 | @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}.  The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
 | 
|---|
| 4045 | specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
 | 
|---|
| 4046 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4047 | @cindex dot inside sections
 | 
|---|
| 4048 | Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
 | 
|---|
| 4049 | current containing object.  Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
 | 
|---|
| 4050 | statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
 | 
|---|
| 4051 | absolute address.  If @code{.} is used inside a section description
 | 
|---|
| 4052 | however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
 | 
|---|
| 4053 | not an absolute address.  Thus in a script like this:
 | 
|---|
| 4054 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4055 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4056 | SECTIONS
 | 
|---|
| 4057 | @{
 | 
|---|
| 4058 |     . = 0x100
 | 
|---|
| 4059 |     .text: @{
 | 
|---|
| 4060 |       *(.text)
 | 
|---|
| 4061 |       . = 0x200
 | 
|---|
| 4062 |     @}
 | 
|---|
| 4063 |     . = 0x500
 | 
|---|
| 4064 |     .data: @{
 | 
|---|
| 4065 |       *(.data)
 | 
|---|
| 4066 |       . += 0x600
 | 
|---|
| 4067 |     @}
 | 
|---|
| 4068 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 4069 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4070 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4071 | The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
 | 
|---|
| 4072 | and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
 | 
|---|
| 4073 | the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area.  (If there is too
 | 
|---|
| 4074 | much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
 | 
|---|
| 4075 | move @code{.} backwards).  The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
 | 
|---|
| 4076 | and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
 | 
|---|
| 4077 | the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
 | 
|---|
| 4078 | the @samp{.data} output section itself.
 | 
|---|
| 4079 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4080 | @need 2000
 | 
|---|
| 4081 | @node Operators
 | 
|---|
| 4082 | @subsection Operators
 | 
|---|
| 4083 | @cindex operators for arithmetic
 | 
|---|
| 4084 | @cindex arithmetic operators
 | 
|---|
| 4085 | @cindex precedence in expressions
 | 
|---|
| 4086 | The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
 | 
|---|
| 4087 | the standard bindings and precedence levels:
 | 
|---|
| 4088 | @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
 | 
|---|
| 4089 | @ifnottex
 | 
|---|
| 4090 | @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
 | 
|---|
| 4091 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4092 | precedence      associativity   Operators                Notes
 | 
|---|
| 4093 | (highest)
 | 
|---|
| 4094 | 1               left            !  -  ~                  (1)
 | 
|---|
| 4095 | 2               left            *  /  %
 | 
|---|
| 4096 | 3               left            +  -
 | 
|---|
| 4097 | 4               left            >>  <<
 | 
|---|
| 4098 | 5               left            ==  !=  >  <  <=  >=
 | 
|---|
| 4099 | 6               left            &
 | 
|---|
| 4100 | 7               left            |
 | 
|---|
| 4101 | 8               left            &&
 | 
|---|
| 4102 | 9               left            ||
 | 
|---|
| 4103 | 10              right           ? :
 | 
|---|
| 4104 | 11              right           &=  +=  -=  *=  /=       (2)
 | 
|---|
| 4105 | (lowest)
 | 
|---|
| 4106 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4107 | Notes:
 | 
|---|
| 4108 | (1) Prefix operators
 | 
|---|
| 4109 | (2) @xref{Assignments}.
 | 
|---|
| 4110 | @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
 | 
|---|
| 4111 | @end ifnottex
 | 
|---|
| 4112 | @tex
 | 
|---|
| 4113 | \vskip \baselineskip
 | 
|---|
| 4114 | %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4115 | \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
 | 
|---|
| 4116 | \hrule
 | 
|---|
| 4117 | \halign
 | 
|---|
| 4118 | {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
 | 
|---|
| 4119 | height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
 | 
|---|
| 4120 | &Precedence&&  Associativity  &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
 | 
|---|
| 4121 | height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
 | 
|---|
| 4122 | \noalign{\hrule}
 | 
|---|
| 4123 | height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
 | 
|---|
| 4124 | &highest&&&&&\cr
 | 
|---|
| 4125 | % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
 | 
|---|
| 4126 | &1&&left&&\qquad-          \char'176\      !\qquad\dag&\cr
 | 
|---|
| 4127 | &2&&left&&*          /        \%&\cr
 | 
|---|
| 4128 | &3&&left&&+          -&\cr
 | 
|---|
| 4129 | &4&&left&&>>         <<&\cr
 | 
|---|
| 4130 | &5&&left&&==         !=       >      <      <=      >=&\cr
 | 
|---|
| 4131 | &6&&left&&\&&\cr
 | 
|---|
| 4132 | &7&&left&&|&\cr
 | 
|---|
| 4133 | &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
 | 
|---|
| 4134 | &9&&left&&||&\cr
 | 
|---|
| 4135 | &10&&right&&?        :&\cr
 | 
|---|
| 4136 | &11&&right&&\qquad\&=      +=       -=     *=     /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
 | 
|---|
| 4137 | &lowest&&&&&\cr
 | 
|---|
| 4138 | height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
 | 
|---|
| 4139 | \hrule}
 | 
|---|
| 4140 | @end tex
 | 
|---|
| 4141 | @iftex
 | 
|---|
| 4142 | {
 | 
|---|
| 4143 | @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
 | 
|---|
| 4144 | @dag@quad Prefix operators.
 | 
|---|
| 4145 | @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
 | 
|---|
| 4146 | }
 | 
|---|
| 4147 | @end iftex
 | 
|---|
| 4148 | @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
 | 
|---|
| 4149 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4150 | @node Evaluation
 | 
|---|
| 4151 | @subsection Evaluation
 | 
|---|
| 4152 | @cindex lazy evaluation
 | 
|---|
| 4153 | @cindex expression evaluation order
 | 
|---|
| 4154 | The linker evaluates expressions lazily.  It only computes the value of
 | 
|---|
| 4155 | an expression when absolutely necessary.
 | 
|---|
| 4156 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4157 | The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
 | 
|---|
| 4158 | address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
 | 
|---|
| 4159 | regions, in order to do any linking at all.  These values are computed
 | 
|---|
| 4160 | as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
 | 
|---|
| 4161 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4162 | However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
 | 
|---|
| 4163 | until after storage allocation.  Such values are evaluated later, when
 | 
|---|
| 4164 | other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
 | 
|---|
| 4165 | for use in the symbol assignment expression.
 | 
|---|
| 4166 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4167 | The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
 | 
|---|
| 4168 | assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
 | 
|---|
| 4169 | allocation.
 | 
|---|
| 4170 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4171 | Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
 | 
|---|
| 4172 | @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
 | 
|---|
| 4173 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4174 | If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
 | 
|---|
| 4175 | available, then an error results.  For example, a script like the
 | 
|---|
| 4176 | following
 | 
|---|
| 4177 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4178 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 4179 | SECTIONS
 | 
|---|
| 4180 |   @{
 | 
|---|
| 4181 |     .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
 | 
|---|
| 4182 |       @{ *(.text) @}
 | 
|---|
| 4183 |   @}
 | 
|---|
| 4184 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 4185 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4186 | @noindent
 | 
|---|
| 4187 | will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
 | 
|---|
| 4188 | address}.
 | 
|---|
| 4189 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4190 | @node Expression Section
 | 
|---|
| 4191 | @subsection The Section of an Expression
 | 
|---|
| 4192 | @cindex expression sections
 | 
|---|
| 4193 | @cindex absolute expressions
 | 
|---|
| 4194 | @cindex relative expressions
 | 
|---|
| 4195 | @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
 | 
|---|
| 4196 | @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
 | 
|---|
| 4197 | @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
 | 
|---|
| 4198 | When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
 | 
|---|
| 4199 | or relative to some section.  A relative expression is expressed as a
 | 
|---|
| 4200 | fixed offset from the base of a section.
 | 
|---|
| 4201 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4202 | The position of the expression within the linker script determines
 | 
|---|
| 4203 | whether it is absolute or relative.  An expression which appears within
 | 
|---|
| 4204 | an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
 | 
|---|
| 4205 | section.  An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
 | 
|---|
| 4206 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4207 | A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
 | 
|---|
| 4208 | relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option.  That means that a
 | 
|---|
| 4209 | further link operation may change the value of the symbol.  The symbol's
 | 
|---|
| 4210 | section will be the section of the relative expression.
 | 
|---|
| 4211 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4212 | A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
 | 
|---|
| 4213 | through any further link operation.  The symbol will be absolute, and
 | 
|---|
| 4214 | will not have any particular associated section.
 | 
|---|
| 4215 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4216 | You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
 | 
|---|
| 4217 | to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative.  For example, to
 | 
|---|
| 4218 | create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
 | 
|---|
| 4219 | section @samp{.data}:
 | 
|---|
| 4220 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4221 | SECTIONS
 | 
|---|
| 4222 |   @{
 | 
|---|
| 4223 |     .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
 | 
|---|
| 4224 |   @}
 | 
|---|
| 4225 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4226 | @noindent
 | 
|---|
| 4227 | If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
 | 
|---|
| 4228 | @samp{.data} section.
 | 
|---|
| 4229 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4230 | @node Builtin Functions
 | 
|---|
| 4231 | @subsection Builtin Functions
 | 
|---|
| 4232 | @cindex functions in expressions
 | 
|---|
| 4233 | The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
 | 
|---|
| 4234 | use in linker script expressions.
 | 
|---|
| 4235 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4236 | @table @code
 | 
|---|
| 4237 | @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
 | 
|---|
| 4238 | @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
 | 
|---|
| 4239 | @cindex expression, absolute
 | 
|---|
| 4240 | Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
 | 
|---|
| 4241 | of the expression @var{exp}.  Primarily useful to assign an absolute
 | 
|---|
| 4242 | value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
 | 
|---|
| 4243 | normally section relative.  @xref{Expression Section}.
 | 
|---|
| 4244 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4245 | @item ADDR(@var{section})
 | 
|---|
| 4246 | @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
 | 
|---|
| 4247 | @cindex section address in expression
 | 
|---|
| 4248 | Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}.  Your
 | 
|---|
| 4249 | script must previously have defined the location of that section.  In
 | 
|---|
| 4250 | the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
 | 
|---|
| 4251 | identical values:
 | 
|---|
| 4252 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4253 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 4254 | SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 4255 |   .output1 :
 | 
|---|
| 4256 |     @{
 | 
|---|
| 4257 |     start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
 | 
|---|
| 4258 |     @dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 4259 |     @}
 | 
|---|
| 4260 |   .output :
 | 
|---|
| 4261 |     @{
 | 
|---|
| 4262 |     symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
 | 
|---|
| 4263 |     symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
 | 
|---|
| 4264 |     @}
 | 
|---|
| 4265 | @dots{} @}
 | 
|---|
| 4266 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 4267 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4268 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4269 | @item ALIGN(@var{exp})
 | 
|---|
| 4270 | @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp})
 | 
|---|
| 4271 | @cindex round up location counter
 | 
|---|
| 4272 | @cindex align location counter
 | 
|---|
| 4273 | Return the location counter (@code{.}) aligned to the next @var{exp}
 | 
|---|
| 4274 | boundary.
 | 
|---|
| 4275 | @code{ALIGN} doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just
 | 
|---|
| 4276 | does arithmetic on it.  Here is an example which aligns the output
 | 
|---|
| 4277 | @code{.data} section to the next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the
 | 
|---|
| 4278 | preceding section and sets a variable within the section to the next
 | 
|---|
| 4279 | @code{0x8000} boundary after the input sections:
 | 
|---|
| 4280 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4281 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 4282 | SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 4283 |   .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
 | 
|---|
| 4284 |     *(.data)
 | 
|---|
| 4285 |     variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
 | 
|---|
| 4286 |   @}
 | 
|---|
| 4287 | @dots{} @}
 | 
|---|
| 4288 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 4289 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4290 | @noindent
 | 
|---|
| 4291 | The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
 | 
|---|
| 4292 | a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
 | 
|---|
| 4293 | a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}).  The second use
 | 
|---|
| 4294 | of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
 | 
|---|
| 4295 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4296 | The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
 | 
|---|
| 4297 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4298 | @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
 | 
|---|
| 4299 | @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
 | 
|---|
| 4300 | This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
 | 
|---|
| 4301 | scripts.  It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
 | 
|---|
| 4302 | section.
 | 
|---|
| 4303 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4304 | @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
 | 
|---|
| 4305 | @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
 | 
|---|
| 4306 | This is equivalent to either
 | 
|---|
| 4307 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4308 | (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
 | 
|---|
| 4309 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4310 | or
 | 
|---|
| 4311 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4312 | (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
 | 
|---|
| 4313 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4314 | @noindent
 | 
|---|
| 4315 | depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
 | 
|---|
| 4316 | for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
 | 
|---|
| 4317 | @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
 | 
|---|
| 4318 | If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
 | 
|---|
| 4319 | memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
 | 
|---|
| 4320 | bytes in the on-disk file.
 | 
|---|
| 4321 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4322 | This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
 | 
|---|
| 4323 | any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
 | 
|---|
| 4324 | @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
 | 
|---|
| 4325 | be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
 | 
|---|
| 4326 | working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
 | 
|---|
| 4327 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4328 | @noindent
 | 
|---|
| 4329 | Example:
 | 
|---|
| 4330 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4331 |   . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
 | 
|---|
| 4332 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4333 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4334 | @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
 | 
|---|
| 4335 | @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
 | 
|---|
| 4336 | This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
 | 
|---|
| 4337 | evaluation purposes.
 | 
|---|
| 4338 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4339 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4340 |   . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
 | 
|---|
| 4341 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4342 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4343 | @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
 | 
|---|
| 4344 | @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
 | 
|---|
| 4345 | @cindex symbol defaults
 | 
|---|
| 4346 | Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
 | 
|---|
| 4347 | defined, otherwise return 0.  You can use this function to provide
 | 
|---|
| 4348 | default values for symbols.  For example, the following script fragment
 | 
|---|
| 4349 | shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
 | 
|---|
| 4350 | the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
 | 
|---|
| 4351 | existed, its value is preserved:
 | 
|---|
| 4352 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4353 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4354 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 4355 | SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 4356 |   .text : @{
 | 
|---|
| 4357 |     begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
 | 
|---|
| 4358 |     @dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 4359 |   @}
 | 
|---|
| 4360 |   @dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 4361 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 4362 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 4363 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4364 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4365 | @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
 | 
|---|
| 4366 | @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
 | 
|---|
| 4367 | @cindex section load address in expression
 | 
|---|
| 4368 | Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}.  This is normally
 | 
|---|
| 4369 | the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
 | 
|---|
| 4370 | attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
 | 
|---|
| 4371 | Section LMA}).
 | 
|---|
| 4372 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4373 | @kindex MAX
 | 
|---|
| 4374 | @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
 | 
|---|
| 4375 | Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
 | 
|---|
| 4376 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4377 | @kindex MIN
 | 
|---|
| 4378 | @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
 | 
|---|
| 4379 | Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
 | 
|---|
| 4380 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4381 | @item NEXT(@var{exp})
 | 
|---|
| 4382 | @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
 | 
|---|
| 4383 | @cindex unallocated address, next
 | 
|---|
| 4384 | Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
 | 
|---|
| 4385 | This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
 | 
|---|
| 4386 | use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
 | 
|---|
| 4387 | output file, the two functions are equivalent.
 | 
|---|
| 4388 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4389 | @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
 | 
|---|
| 4390 | @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
 | 
|---|
| 4391 | @cindex section size
 | 
|---|
| 4392 | Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
 | 
|---|
| 4393 | been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated when this is
 | 
|---|
| 4394 | evaluated, the linker will report an error.  In the following example,
 | 
|---|
| 4395 | @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
 | 
|---|
| 4396 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4397 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 4398 | SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 4399 |   .output @{
 | 
|---|
| 4400 |     .start = . ;
 | 
|---|
| 4401 |     @dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 4402 |     .end = . ;
 | 
|---|
| 4403 |     @}
 | 
|---|
| 4404 |   symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
 | 
|---|
| 4405 |   symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
 | 
|---|
| 4406 | @dots{} @}
 | 
|---|
| 4407 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 4408 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4409 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4410 | @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
 | 
|---|
| 4411 | @itemx sizeof_headers
 | 
|---|
| 4412 | @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
 | 
|---|
| 4413 | @cindex header size
 | 
|---|
| 4414 | Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers.  This is
 | 
|---|
| 4415 | information which appears at the start of the output file.  You can use
 | 
|---|
| 4416 | this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
 | 
|---|
| 4417 | choose, to facilitate paging.
 | 
|---|
| 4418 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4419 | @cindex not enough room for program headers
 | 
|---|
| 4420 | @cindex program headers, not enough room
 | 
|---|
| 4421 | When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
 | 
|---|
| 4422 | @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
 | 
|---|
| 4423 | number of program headers before it has determined all the section
 | 
|---|
| 4424 | addresses and sizes.  If the linker later discovers that it needs
 | 
|---|
| 4425 | additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
 | 
|---|
| 4426 | room for program headers}.  To avoid this error, you must avoid using
 | 
|---|
| 4427 | the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
 | 
|---|
| 4428 | script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
 | 
|---|
| 4429 | you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
 | 
|---|
| 4430 | command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
 | 
|---|
| 4431 | @end table
 | 
|---|
| 4432 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4433 | @node Implicit Linker Scripts
 | 
|---|
| 4434 | @section Implicit Linker Scripts
 | 
|---|
| 4435 | @cindex implicit linker scripts
 | 
|---|
| 4436 | If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
 | 
|---|
| 4437 | an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
 | 
|---|
| 4438 | linker script.  If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
 | 
|---|
| 4439 | linker will report an error.
 | 
|---|
| 4440 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4441 | An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
 | 
|---|
| 4442 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4443 | Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
 | 
|---|
| 4444 | assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
 | 
|---|
| 4445 | commands.
 | 
|---|
| 4446 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4447 | Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
 | 
|---|
| 4448 | at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
 | 
|---|
| 4449 | read.  This can affect archive searching.
 | 
|---|
| 4450 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4451 | @ifset GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 4452 | @node Machine Dependent
 | 
|---|
| 4453 | @chapter Machine Dependent Features
 | 
|---|
| 4454 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4455 | @cindex machine dependencies
 | 
|---|
| 4456 | @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
 | 
|---|
| 4457 | sections describe them.  Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
 | 
|---|
| 4458 | functionality are not listed.
 | 
|---|
| 4459 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4460 | @menu
 | 
|---|
| 4461 | @ifset H8300
 | 
|---|
| 4462 | * H8/300::                      @command{ld} and the H8/300
 | 
|---|
| 4463 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 4464 | @ifset I960
 | 
|---|
| 4465 | * i960::                        @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
 | 
|---|
| 4466 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 4467 | @ifset ARM
 | 
|---|
| 4468 | * ARM::                         @command{ld} and the ARM family
 | 
|---|
| 4469 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 4470 | @ifset HPPA
 | 
|---|
| 4471 | * HPPA ELF32::                  @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
 | 
|---|
| 4472 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 4473 | @ifset MMIX
 | 
|---|
| 4474 | * MMIX::                        @command{ld} and MMIX
 | 
|---|
| 4475 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 4476 | @ifset MSP430
 | 
|---|
| 4477 | * MSP430::                      @command{ld} and MSP430
 | 
|---|
| 4478 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 4479 | @ifset TICOFF
 | 
|---|
| 4480 | * TI COFF::                     @command{ld} and TI COFF
 | 
|---|
| 4481 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 4482 | @ifset WIN32
 | 
|---|
| 4483 | * WIN32::                       @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
 | 
|---|
| 4484 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 4485 | @ifset XTENSA
 | 
|---|
| 4486 | * Xtensa::                      @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
 | 
|---|
| 4487 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 4488 | @end menu
 | 
|---|
| 4489 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 4490 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4491 | @ifset H8300
 | 
|---|
| 4492 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 4493 | @raisesections
 | 
|---|
| 4494 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 4495 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4496 | @node H8/300
 | 
|---|
| 4497 | @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
 | 
|---|
| 4498 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4499 | @cindex H8/300 support
 | 
|---|
| 4500 | For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
 | 
|---|
| 4501 | you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
 | 
|---|
| 4502 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4503 | @table @emph
 | 
|---|
| 4504 | @cindex relaxing on H8/300
 | 
|---|
| 4505 | @item relaxing address modes
 | 
|---|
| 4506 | @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
 | 
|---|
| 4507 | targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
 | 
|---|
| 4508 | program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
 | 
|---|
| 4509 | respectively.
 | 
|---|
| 4510 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4511 | @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
 | 
|---|
| 4512 | @item synthesizing instructions
 | 
|---|
| 4513 | @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
 | 
|---|
| 4514 | @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
 | 
|---|
| 4515 | sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
 | 
|---|
| 4516 | page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
 | 
|---|
| 4517 | (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
 | 
|---|
| 4518 | @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
 | 
|---|
| 4519 | top page of memory).
 | 
|---|
| 4520 | @end table
 | 
|---|
| 4521 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4522 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 4523 | @lowersections
 | 
|---|
| 4524 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 4525 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 4526 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4527 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 4528 | @ifset Renesas
 | 
|---|
| 4529 | @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
 | 
|---|
| 4530 | @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
 | 
|---|
| 4531 | @node Renesas
 | 
|---|
| 4532 | @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
 | 
|---|
| 4533 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4534 | @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
 | 
|---|
| 4535 | H8/500, and SH chips.  No special features, commands, or command-line
 | 
|---|
| 4536 | options are required for these chips.
 | 
|---|
| 4537 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 4538 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 4539 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4540 | @ifset I960
 | 
|---|
| 4541 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 4542 | @raisesections
 | 
|---|
| 4543 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 4544 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4545 | @node i960
 | 
|---|
| 4546 | @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
 | 
|---|
| 4547 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4548 | @cindex i960 support
 | 
|---|
| 4549 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4550 | You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
 | 
|---|
| 4551 | specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
 | 
|---|
| 4552 | family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
 | 
|---|
| 4553 | incompatible instructions in the input files.  It also modifies the
 | 
|---|
| 4554 | linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
 | 
|---|
| 4555 | libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
 | 
|---|
| 4556 | search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
 | 
|---|
| 4557 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4558 | For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
 | 
|---|
| 4559 | well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
 | 
|---|
| 4560 | paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
 | 
|---|
| 4561 | the names
 | 
|---|
| 4562 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4563 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4564 | @group
 | 
|---|
| 4565 | try
 | 
|---|
| 4566 | libtry.a
 | 
|---|
| 4567 | tryca
 | 
|---|
| 4568 | libtryca.a
 | 
|---|
| 4569 | @end group
 | 
|---|
| 4570 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 4571 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4572 | @noindent
 | 
|---|
| 4573 | The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
 | 
|---|
| 4574 | two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
 | 
|---|
| 4575 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4576 | You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
 | 
|---|
| 4577 | the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
 | 
|---|
| 4578 | use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
 | 
|---|
| 4579 | specifies a library.
 | 
|---|
| 4580 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4581 | @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
 | 
|---|
| 4582 | @cindex relaxing on i960
 | 
|---|
| 4583 | @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family.  If
 | 
|---|
| 4584 | you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
 | 
|---|
| 4585 | @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
 | 
|---|
| 4586 | them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
 | 
|---|
| 4587 | instructions, respectively.  @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
 | 
|---|
| 4588 | instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
 | 
|---|
| 4589 | target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
 | 
|---|
| 4590 | not itself call any subroutines).
 | 
|---|
| 4591 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4592 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 4593 | @lowersections
 | 
|---|
| 4594 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 4595 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 4596 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4597 | @ifset ARM
 | 
|---|
| 4598 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 4599 | @raisesections
 | 
|---|
| 4600 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 4601 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4602 | @node ARM
 | 
|---|
| 4603 | @section @command{ld}'s Support for Interworking Between ARM and Thumb Code
 | 
|---|
| 4604 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4605 | @cindex ARM interworking support
 | 
|---|
| 4606 | @kindex --support-old-code
 | 
|---|
| 4607 | For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
 | 
|---|
| 4608 | betweem ARM and Thumb code.  These stubs only work with code that has
 | 
|---|
| 4609 | been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
 | 
|---|
| 4610 | line option.  If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
 | 
|---|
| 4611 | libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
 | 
|---|
| 4612 | option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
 | 
|---|
| 4613 | given to the linker.  This will make it generate larger stub functions
 | 
|---|
| 4614 | which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code.  Note, however,
 | 
|---|
| 4615 | the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
 | 
|---|
| 4616 | non-interworking aware Thumb code.
 | 
|---|
| 4617 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4618 | @cindex thumb entry point
 | 
|---|
| 4619 | @cindex entry point, thumb
 | 
|---|
| 4620 | @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
 | 
|---|
| 4621 | The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
 | 
|---|
| 4622 | @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
 | 
|---|
| 4623 | But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
 | 
|---|
| 4624 | branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
 | 
|---|
| 4625 | executing in Thumb mode straight away.
 | 
|---|
| 4626 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4627 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 4628 | @lowersections
 | 
|---|
| 4629 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 4630 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 4631 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4632 | @ifset HPPA
 | 
|---|
| 4633 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 4634 | @raisesections
 | 
|---|
| 4635 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 4636 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4637 | @node HPPA ELF32
 | 
|---|
| 4638 | @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
 | 
|---|
| 4639 | @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
 | 
|---|
| 4640 | @kindex --multi-subspace
 | 
|---|
| 4641 | When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
 | 
|---|
| 4642 | import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
 | 
|---|
| 4643 | The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
 | 
|---|
| 4644 | stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
 | 
|---|
| 4645 | multiple sub-spaces.
 | 
|---|
| 4646 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4647 | @cindex HPPA stub grouping
 | 
|---|
| 4648 | @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
 | 
|---|
| 4649 | Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
 | 
|---|
| 4650 | stub sections located between groups of input sections.
 | 
|---|
| 4651 | @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
 | 
|---|
| 4652 | sections handled by one stub section.  Since branch offsets are signed,
 | 
|---|
| 4653 | a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
 | 
|---|
| 4654 | the stub section, and one group after it.  However, when using
 | 
|---|
| 4655 | conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
 | 
|---|
| 4656 | prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
 | 
|---|
| 4657 | A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
 | 
|---|
| 4658 | branches to stubs always use a negative offset.  Two special values of
 | 
|---|
| 4659 | @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}.  These both instruct
 | 
|---|
| 4660 | @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
 | 
|---|
| 4661 | detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
 | 
|---|
| 4662 | positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
 | 
|---|
| 4663 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4664 | Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections.  A
 | 
|---|
| 4665 | single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
 | 
|---|
| 4666 | create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections are too
 | 
|---|
| 4667 | large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
 | 
|---|
| 4668 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4669 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 4670 | @lowersections
 | 
|---|
| 4671 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 4672 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 4673 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4674 | @ifset MMIX
 | 
|---|
| 4675 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 4676 | @raisesections
 | 
|---|
| 4677 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 4678 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4679 | @node MMIX
 | 
|---|
| 4680 | @section @code{ld} and MMIX
 | 
|---|
| 4681 | For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
 | 
|---|
| 4682 | @code{mmo} object files when linking.  The simulator @code{mmix}
 | 
|---|
| 4683 | understands the @code{mmo} format.  The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
 | 
|---|
| 4684 | can translate between the two formats.
 | 
|---|
| 4685 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4686 | There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
 | 
|---|
| 4687 | Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
 | 
|---|
| 4688 | registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
 | 
|---|
| 4689 | equal to registers.  In a final link, the start address of the
 | 
|---|
| 4690 | @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
 | 
|---|
| 4691 | global register multiplied by 8.  Register @code{$255} is not included in
 | 
|---|
| 4692 | this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
 | 
|---|
| 4693 | symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
 | 
|---|
| 4694 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4695 | Symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
 | 
|---|
| 4696 | @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special;
 | 
|---|
| 4697 | there must be only one each, even if they are local.  The default linker
 | 
|---|
| 4698 | script uses these to set the default start address of a section.
 | 
|---|
| 4699 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4700 | Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
 | 
|---|
| 4701 | are left out from an mmo file.
 | 
|---|
| 4702 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4703 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 4704 | @lowersections
 | 
|---|
| 4705 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 4706 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 4707 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4708 | @ifset MSP430
 | 
|---|
| 4709 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 4710 | @raisesections
 | 
|---|
| 4711 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 4712 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4713 | @node  MSP430
 | 
|---|
| 4714 | @section @code{ld} and MSP430
 | 
|---|
| 4715 | For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture.  The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
 | 
|---|
| 4716 | will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type.  (To get a list of known MPUs
 | 
|---|
| 4717 | just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
 | 
|---|
| 4718 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4719 | @cindex MSP430 extra sections
 | 
|---|
| 4720 | The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
 | 
|---|
| 4721 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4722 | @table @code
 | 
|---|
| 4723 | @item @samp{.vectors}
 | 
|---|
| 4724 | Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
 | 
|---|
| 4725 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4726 | @item @samp{.bootloader}
 | 
|---|
| 4727 | Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable).  Any code
 | 
|---|
| 4728 | in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
 | 
|---|
| 4729 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4730 | @item @samp{.infomem}
 | 
|---|
| 4731 | Defines an information memory section (if applicable).  Any code in
 | 
|---|
| 4732 | this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
 | 
|---|
| 4733 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4734 | @item @samp{.infomemnobits} 
 | 
|---|
| 4735 | This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
 | 
|---|
| 4736 | in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
 | 
|---|
| 4737 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4738 | @item @samp{.noinit}
 | 
|---|
| 4739 | Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
 | 
|---|
| 4740 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4741 | The last two sections are used by gcc. 
 | 
|---|
| 4742 | @end table
 | 
|---|
| 4743 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4744 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 4745 | @lowersections
 | 
|---|
| 4746 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 4747 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 4748 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4749 | @ifset TICOFF
 | 
|---|
| 4750 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 4751 | @raisesections
 | 
|---|
| 4752 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 4753 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4754 | @node TI COFF
 | 
|---|
| 4755 | @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
 | 
|---|
| 4756 | @cindex TI COFF versions
 | 
|---|
| 4757 | @kindex --format=@var{version}
 | 
|---|
| 4758 | The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
 | 
|---|
| 4759 | TI COFF versions.  The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
 | 
|---|
| 4760 | also supported.  The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
 | 
|---|
| 4761 | format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
 | 
|---|
| 4762 | header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
 | 
|---|
| 4763 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4764 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 4765 | @lowersections
 | 
|---|
| 4766 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 4767 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 4768 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4769 | @ifset WIN32
 | 
|---|
| 4770 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 4771 | @raisesections
 | 
|---|
| 4772 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 4773 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4774 | @node WIN32
 | 
|---|
| 4775 | @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
 | 
|---|
| 4776 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4777 | This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues. 
 | 
|---|
| 4778 | See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed decription of the
 | 
|---|
| 4779 | command line options mentioned here.
 | 
|---|
| 4780 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4781 | @table @emph
 | 
|---|
| 4782 | @cindex import libraries 
 | 
|---|
| 4783 | @item import libraries 
 | 
|---|
| 4784 | The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
 | 
|---|
| 4785 | libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's.  They are
 | 
|---|
| 4786 | regular static archives and are handled as any other static
 | 
|---|
| 4787 | archive.  The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
 | 
|---|
| 4788 | support for creating such libraries provided with the
 | 
|---|
| 4789 | @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
 | 
|---|
| 4790 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4791 | @item   exporting DLL symbols 
 | 
|---|
| 4792 | @cindex exporting DLL symbols 
 | 
|---|
| 4793 | The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
 | 
|---|
| 4794 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4795 | @table @emph
 | 
|---|
| 4796 | @item   using auto-export functionality
 | 
|---|
| 4797 | @cindex using auto-export functionality
 | 
|---|
| 4798 | By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
 | 
|---|
| 4799 | which is controlled by the following command line options:
 | 
|---|
| 4800 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4801 | @itemize
 | 
|---|
| 4802 | @item --export-all-symbols   [This is the default]
 | 
|---|
| 4803 | @item --exclude-symbols
 | 
|---|
| 4804 | @item --exclude-libs
 | 
|---|
| 4805 | @end itemize
 | 
|---|
| 4806 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4807 | If, however, @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the 
 | 
|---|
| 4808 | command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
 | 
|---|
| 4809 | if either of the following are true:
 | 
|---|
| 4810 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4811 | @itemize
 | 
|---|
| 4812 | @item A DEF file is used.
 | 
|---|
| 4813 | @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
 | 
|---|
| 4814 | @end itemize
 | 
|---|
| 4815 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4816 | @item   using a DEF file 
 | 
|---|
| 4817 | @cindex using a DEF file 
 | 
|---|
| 4818 | Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file.  A DEF file is
 | 
|---|
| 4819 | an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
 | 
|---|
| 4820 | exported when a dll is created.  Usually it is named @samp{<dll
 | 
|---|
| 4821 | name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
 | 
|---|
| 4822 | command line.  The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
 | 
|---|
| 4823 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4824 | @example
 | 
|---|
| 4825 | gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
 | 
|---|
| 4826 | @end example
 | 
|---|
| 4827 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4828 | Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
 | 
|---|
| 4829 | @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
 | 
|---|
| 4830 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4831 | Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
 | 
|---|
| 4832 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4833 | @example
 | 
|---|
| 4834 | LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x10000000
 | 
|---|
| 4835 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4836 | EXPORTS
 | 
|---|
| 4837 | foo
 | 
|---|
| 4838 | bar
 | 
|---|
| 4839 | _bar = bar
 | 
|---|
| 4840 | @end example 
 | 
|---|
| 4841 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4842 | This example defines a base address and three symbols.  The third
 | 
|---|
| 4843 | symbol is an alias for the second.  For the complete format
 | 
|---|
| 4844 | specification see ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources.
 | 
|---|
| 4845 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4846 | @cindex creating a DEF file
 | 
|---|
| 4847 | While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
 | 
|---|
| 4848 | with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
 | 
|---|
| 4849 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4850 | @item   Using decorations
 | 
|---|
| 4851 | @cindex Using decorations
 | 
|---|
| 4852 | Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
 | 
|---|
| 4853 | itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
 | 
|---|
| 4854 | declared as:
 | 
|---|
| 4855 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4856 | @example
 | 
|---|
| 4857 | __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
 | 
|---|
| 4858 | __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
 | 
|---|
| 4859 | @end example
 | 
|---|
| 4860 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4861 | All such symbols will be exported from the DLL.  If, however,
 | 
|---|
| 4862 | any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
 | 
|---|
| 4863 | this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
 | 
|---|
| 4864 | the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
 | 
|---|
| 4865 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4866 | Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
 | 
|---|
| 4867 | decorate them with dllexport.  Instead, they should use dllimport, 
 | 
|---|
| 4868 | instead:
 | 
|---|
| 4869 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4870 | @example
 | 
|---|
| 4871 | __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
 | 
|---|
| 4872 | __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
 | 
|---|
| 4873 | @end example
 | 
|---|
| 4874 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4875 | This complicates the structure of library header files, because 
 | 
|---|
| 4876 | when included by the library itself the header must declare the 
 | 
|---|
| 4877 | variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
 | 
|---|
| 4878 | code the header must declare them as dllimport.  There are a number
 | 
|---|
| 4879 | of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can 
 | 
|---|
| 4880 | omit the __declspec() declaration completely.  See
 | 
|---|
| 4881 | @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
 | 
|---|
| 4882 | imformation.
 | 
|---|
| 4883 | @end table 
 | 
|---|
| 4884 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4885 | @cindex automatic data imports
 | 
|---|
| 4886 | @item automatic data imports
 | 
|---|
| 4887 | The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
 | 
|---|
| 4888 | by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
 | 
|---|
| 4889 | compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
 | 
|---|
| 4890 | issue.  This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x 
 | 
|---|
| 4891 | code to these platforms, especially for large
 | 
|---|
| 4892 | c++ libraries and applications.  The auto-import feature, which was
 | 
|---|
| 4893 | initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the 
 | 
|---|
| 4894 | decorations to archieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
 | 
|---|
| 4895 | platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import} 
 | 
|---|
| 4896 | command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
 | 
|---|
| 4897 | The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
 | 
|---|
| 4898 | suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
 | 
|---|
| 4899 | trigger the feature's use.
 | 
|---|
| 4900 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4901 | auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without 
 | 
|---|
| 4902 | additional assistance.  Sometimes, you will see this message
 | 
|---|
| 4903 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4904 | "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the 
 | 
|---|
| 4905 | documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
 | 
|---|
| 4906 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4907 | The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error 
 | 
|---|
| 4908 | occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.  
 | 
|---|
| 4909 | One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described 
 | 
|---|
| 4910 | below.
 | 
|---|
| 4911 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4912 | @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
 | 
|---|
| 4913 | For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes), 
 | 
|---|
| 4914 | object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an 
 | 
|---|
| 4915 | offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular 
 | 
|---|
| 4916 | field or public member, for instance.  Unfortunately, the runtime loader used 
 | 
|---|
| 4917 | in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime 
 | 
|---|
| 4918 | without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
 | 
|---|
| 4919 | The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these 
 | 
|---|
| 4920 | references.
 | 
|---|
| 4921 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4922 | The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to 
 | 
|---|
| 4923 | be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references 
 | 
|---|
| 4924 | themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the 
 | 
|---|
| 4925 | runtime environment.  Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and 
 | 
|---|
| 4926 | compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not.  However, the 
 | 
|---|
| 4927 | support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will 
 | 
|---|
| 4928 | run without error on an older system.
 | 
|---|
| 4929 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4930 | @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly 
 | 
|---|
| 4931 | enabled as needed. 
 | 
|---|
| 4932 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4933 | @cindex direct linking to a dll
 | 
|---|
| 4934 | @item direct linking to a dll
 | 
|---|
| 4935 | The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
 | 
|---|
| 4936 | including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
 | 
|---|
| 4937 | libraries.  This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
 | 
|---|
| 4938 | traditional import library method, expecially when linking large
 | 
|---|
| 4939 | libraries or applications.  When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each 
 | 
|---|
| 4940 | function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even 
 | 
|---|
| 4941 | though a single bfd could contain many exports.  The overhead involved in 
 | 
|---|
| 4942 | storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
 | 
|---|
| 4943 | tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly 
 | 
|---|
| 4944 | large or complex libraries when using import libs.
 | 
|---|
| 4945 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4946 | Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than 
 | 
|---|
| 4947 | @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
 | 
|---|
| 4948 | of names to match each library.  All that is needed from the developer's 
 | 
|---|
| 4949 | perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
 | 
|---|
| 4950 | select the dll instead of an import library.
 | 
|---|
| 4951 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4952 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4953 | For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
 | 
|---|
| 4954 | to find, in the first directory of its search path,
 | 
|---|
| 4955 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4956 | @example
 | 
|---|
| 4957 | libxxx.dll.a 
 | 
|---|
| 4958 | xxx.dll.a 
 | 
|---|
| 4959 | libxxx.a 
 | 
|---|
| 4960 | cygxxx.dll (*)
 | 
|---|
| 4961 | libxxx.dll 
 | 
|---|
| 4962 | xxx.dll 
 | 
|---|
| 4963 | @end example
 | 
|---|
| 4964 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4965 | before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
 | 
|---|
| 4966 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4967 | (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll}, 
 | 
|---|
| 4968 | where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option 
 | 
|---|
| 4969 | @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec 
 | 
|---|
| 4970 | file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for 
 | 
|---|
| 4971 | @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
 | 
|---|
| 4972 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4973 | Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other 
 | 
|---|
| 4974 | @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature.  It 
 | 
|---|
| 4975 | was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
 | 
|---|
| 4976 | various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
 | 
|---|
| 4977 | could coexist on the same machine.
 | 
|---|
| 4978 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4979 | The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
 | 
|---|
| 4980 | applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
 | 
|---|
| 4981 | libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
 | 
|---|
| 4982 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4983 | @example
 | 
|---|
| 4984 | bin/
 | 
|---|
| 4985 |         cygxxx.dll
 | 
|---|
| 4986 | lib/
 | 
|---|
| 4987 |         libxxx.dll.a   (in case of dll's)
 | 
|---|
| 4988 |         libxxx.a       (in case of static archive) 
 | 
|---|
| 4989 | @end example
 | 
|---|
| 4990 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4991 | Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be 
 | 
|---|
| 4992 | done two ways: 
 | 
|---|
| 4993 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4994 | 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
 | 
|---|
| 4995 | @example
 | 
|---|
| 4996 | gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
 | 
|---|
| 4997 | @end example 
 | 
|---|
| 4998 | 
 | 
|---|
| 4999 | However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
 | 
|---|
| 5000 | (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
 | 
|---|
| 5001 | @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version.  Import libs are generally
 | 
|---|
| 5002 | not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
 | 
|---|
| 5003 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5004 | 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
 | 
|---|
| 5005 | directory according to the above mentioned search pattern.  This
 | 
|---|
| 5006 | should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
 | 
|---|
| 5007 | making the app/dll.
 | 
|---|
| 5008 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5009 | @example
 | 
|---|
| 5010 | ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
 | 
|---|
| 5011 | @end example 
 | 
|---|
| 5012 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5013 | Then you can link without any make environment changes.
 | 
|---|
| 5014 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5015 | @example
 | 
|---|
| 5016 | gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
 | 
|---|
| 5017 | @end example 
 | 
|---|
| 5018 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5019 | This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
 | 
|---|
| 5020 | perfectly legal
 | 
|---|
| 5021 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5022 | @example
 | 
|---|
| 5023 | bin/
 | 
|---|
| 5024 |         cygxxx-5.dll
 | 
|---|
| 5025 | lib/
 | 
|---|
| 5026 |         libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll 
 | 
|---|
| 5027 | @end example
 | 
|---|
| 5028 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5029 | Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
 | 
|---|
| 5030 | even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
 | 
|---|
| 5031 | @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
 | 
|---|
| 5032 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5033 | Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
 | 
|---|
| 5034 | wonder why import libraries are used at all.  There are two reasons:
 | 
|---|
| 5035 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5036 | 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
 | 
|---|
| 5037 | work with auto-imported data.
 | 
|---|
| 5038 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5039 | 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
 | 
|---|
| 5040 | import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
 | 
|---|
| 5041 | symbols that point to the exports of a dll).  Again, the import lib
 | 
|---|
| 5042 | for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
 | 
|---|
| 5043 | possible to do this without an import lib.
 | 
|---|
| 5044 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5045 | So, import libs are not going away.  But the ability to replace
 | 
|---|
| 5046 | true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of) 
 | 
|---|
| 5047 | a dll, in most cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools 
 | 
|---|
| 5048 | binutils makes available to the win32 developer.  Given the 
 | 
|---|
| 5049 | massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
 | 
|---|
| 5050 | requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
 | 
|---|
| 5051 | will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
 | 
|---|
| 5052 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5053 | @item symbol aliasing  
 | 
|---|
| 5054 | @table @emph
 | 
|---|
| 5055 | @item adding additional names 
 | 
|---|
| 5056 | Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.  
 | 
|---|
| 5057 | A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
 | 
|---|
| 5058 | exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
 | 
|---|
| 5059 | when creating the dll.  This will affect also the optional created
 | 
|---|
| 5060 | import library.  Consider the following DEF file: 
 | 
|---|
| 5061 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5062 | @example 
 | 
|---|
| 5063 | LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
 | 
|---|
| 5064 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5065 | EXPORTS
 | 
|---|
| 5066 | foo 
 | 
|---|
| 5067 | _foo = foo
 | 
|---|
| 5068 | @end example 
 | 
|---|
| 5069 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5070 | The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
 | 
|---|
| 5071 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5072 | Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
 | 
|---|
| 5073 | source code using the "weak" attribute:
 | 
|---|
| 5074 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5075 | @example 
 | 
|---|
| 5076 | void foo () @{ /* Do something.  */; @} 
 | 
|---|
| 5077 | void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
 | 
|---|
| 5078 | @end example 
 | 
|---|
| 5079 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5080 | See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
 | 
|---|
| 5081 | symbols.
 | 
|---|
| 5082 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5083 | @item renaming symbols
 | 
|---|
| 5084 | Sometimes it is useful to rename exports.  For instance, the cygwin
 | 
|---|
| 5085 | kernel does this regularly.  A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as 
 | 
|---|
| 5086 | @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
 | 
|---|
| 5087 | DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
 | 
|---|
| 5088 | created).  In the following example: 
 | 
|---|
| 5089 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5090 | @example 
 | 
|---|
| 5091 | LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
 | 
|---|
| 5092 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5093 | EXPORTS
 | 
|---|
| 5094 | _foo = foo
 | 
|---|
| 5095 | @end example 
 | 
|---|
| 5096 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5097 | The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
 | 
|---|
| 5098 | @samp{_foo}.
 | 
|---|
| 5099 | @end table 
 | 
|---|
| 5100 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5101 | Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
 | 
|---|
| 5102 | unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used. 
 | 
|---|
| 5103 | If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
 | 
|---|
| 5104 | @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols 
 | 
|---|
| 5105 | that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the 
 | 
|---|
| 5106 | @samp{--export-all-symbols} option.  If you list only the 
 | 
|---|
| 5107 | renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols} 
 | 
|---|
| 5108 | to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and} 
 | 
|---|
| 5109 | the original names for the the renamed symbols will be exported.  
 | 
|---|
| 5110 | In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them, 
 | 
|---|
| 5111 | which is probably not what you wanted.
 | 
|---|
| 5112 | @end table
 | 
|---|
| 5113 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5114 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 5115 | @lowersections
 | 
|---|
| 5116 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 5117 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 5118 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5119 | @ifset XTENSA
 | 
|---|
| 5120 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 5121 | @raisesections
 | 
|---|
| 5122 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 5123 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5124 | @node Xtensa
 | 
|---|
| 5125 | @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
 | 
|---|
| 5126 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5127 | @cindex Xtensa processors
 | 
|---|
| 5128 | The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
 | 
|---|
| 5129 | @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
 | 
|---|
| 5130 | specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
 | 
|---|
| 5131 | keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets.  For
 | 
|---|
| 5132 | example, with the command:
 | 
|---|
| 5133 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5134 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 5135 | SECTIONS
 | 
|---|
| 5136 | @{
 | 
|---|
| 5137 |   .text : @{
 | 
|---|
| 5138 |     *(.literal .text)
 | 
|---|
| 5139 |   @}
 | 
|---|
| 5140 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 5141 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 5142 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5143 | @noindent
 | 
|---|
| 5144 | @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
 | 
|---|
| 5145 | and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
 | 
|---|
| 5146 | literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets.  A valid
 | 
|---|
| 5147 | interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
 | 
|---|
| 5148 | group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
 | 
|---|
| 5149 | files.  Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
 | 
|---|
| 5150 | and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
 | 
|---|
| 5151 | The non-interleaved order can still be specified as:
 | 
|---|
| 5152 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5153 | @smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 5154 | SECTIONS
 | 
|---|
| 5155 | @{
 | 
|---|
| 5156 |   .text : @{
 | 
|---|
| 5157 |     *(.literal) *(.text)
 | 
|---|
| 5158 |   @}
 | 
|---|
| 5159 | @}
 | 
|---|
| 5160 | @end smallexample
 | 
|---|
| 5161 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5162 | @cindex @code{--relax} on Xtensa
 | 
|---|
| 5163 | @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
 | 
|---|
| 5164 | @kindex --no-relax
 | 
|---|
| 5165 | The Xtensa version of @command{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option by
 | 
|---|
| 5166 | default to attempt to reduce space in the output image by combining
 | 
|---|
| 5167 | literals with identical values.  It also provides the
 | 
|---|
| 5168 | @option{--no-relax} option to disable this optimization.  When enabled,
 | 
|---|
| 5169 | the relaxation algorithm ensures that a literal will only be merged with
 | 
|---|
| 5170 | another literal when the new merged literal location is within the
 | 
|---|
| 5171 | offset range of all of its uses.
 | 
|---|
| 5172 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5173 | The relaxation mechanism will also attempt to optimize
 | 
|---|
| 5174 | assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
 | 
|---|
| 5175 | @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target is known to fit into a
 | 
|---|
| 5176 | @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction encoding.  The current optimization
 | 
|---|
| 5177 | converts the sequence into @code{NOP}/@code{CALL@var{n}} and removes the
 | 
|---|
| 5178 | literal referenced by the @code{L32R} instruction.
 | 
|---|
| 5179 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5180 | @ifclear GENERIC
 | 
|---|
| 5181 | @lowersections
 | 
|---|
| 5182 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 5183 | @end ifset
 | 
|---|
| 5184 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5185 | @ifclear SingleFormat
 | 
|---|
| 5186 | @node BFD
 | 
|---|
| 5187 | @chapter BFD
 | 
|---|
| 5188 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5189 | @cindex back end
 | 
|---|
| 5190 | @cindex object file management
 | 
|---|
| 5191 | @cindex object formats available
 | 
|---|
| 5192 | @kindex objdump -i
 | 
|---|
| 5193 | The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
 | 
|---|
| 5194 | These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
 | 
|---|
| 5195 | object files whatever the object file format.  A different object file
 | 
|---|
| 5196 | format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
 | 
|---|
| 5197 | it to the library.  To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
 | 
|---|
| 5198 | associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
 | 
|---|
| 5199 | object file formats available.  You can use @code{objdump -i}
 | 
|---|
| 5200 | (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
 | 
|---|
| 5201 | list all the formats available for your configuration.
 | 
|---|
| 5202 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5203 | @cindex BFD requirements
 | 
|---|
| 5204 | @cindex requirements for BFD
 | 
|---|
| 5205 | As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
 | 
|---|
| 5206 | several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
 | 
|---|
| 5207 | BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
 | 
|---|
| 5208 | formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
 | 
|---|
| 5209 | been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
 | 
|---|
| 5210 | BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
 | 
|---|
| 5211 | may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
 | 
|---|
| 5212 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5213 | One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
 | 
|---|
| 5214 | mind is the potential for information loss.  There are two places where
 | 
|---|
| 5215 | useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
 | 
|---|
| 5216 | conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
 | 
|---|
| 5217 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5218 | @menu
 | 
|---|
| 5219 | * BFD outline::                 How it works: an outline of BFD
 | 
|---|
| 5220 | @end menu
 | 
|---|
| 5221 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5222 | @node BFD outline
 | 
|---|
| 5223 | @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
 | 
|---|
| 5224 | @cindex opening object files
 | 
|---|
| 5225 | @include bfdsumm.texi
 | 
|---|
| 5226 | @end ifclear
 | 
|---|
| 5227 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5228 | @node Reporting Bugs
 | 
|---|
| 5229 | @chapter Reporting Bugs
 | 
|---|
| 5230 | @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
 | 
|---|
| 5231 | @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
 | 
|---|
| 5232 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5233 | Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
 | 
|---|
| 5234 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5235 | Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
 | 
|---|
| 5236 | it may not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
 | 
|---|
| 5237 | to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
 | 
|---|
| 5238 | work better.  Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
 | 
|---|
| 5239 | @command{ld}.
 | 
|---|
| 5240 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5241 | In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
 | 
|---|
| 5242 | information that enables us to fix the bug.
 | 
|---|
| 5243 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5244 | @menu
 | 
|---|
| 5245 | * Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
 | 
|---|
| 5246 | * Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
 | 
|---|
| 5247 | @end menu
 | 
|---|
| 5248 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5249 | @node Bug Criteria
 | 
|---|
| 5250 | @section Have You Found a Bug?
 | 
|---|
| 5251 | @cindex bug criteria
 | 
|---|
| 5252 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5253 | If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
 | 
|---|
| 5254 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5255 | @itemize @bullet
 | 
|---|
| 5256 | @cindex fatal signal
 | 
|---|
| 5257 | @cindex linker crash
 | 
|---|
| 5258 | @cindex crash of linker
 | 
|---|
| 5259 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 5260 | If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
 | 
|---|
| 5261 | @command{ld} bug.  Reliable linkers never crash.
 | 
|---|
| 5262 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5263 | @cindex error on valid input
 | 
|---|
| 5264 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 5265 | If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
 | 
|---|
| 5266 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5267 | @cindex invalid input
 | 
|---|
| 5268 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 5269 | If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
 | 
|---|
| 5270 | may be a bug.  In the general case, the linker can not verify that
 | 
|---|
| 5271 | object files are correct.
 | 
|---|
| 5272 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5273 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 5274 | If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
 | 
|---|
| 5275 | improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
 | 
|---|
| 5276 | @end itemize
 | 
|---|
| 5277 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5278 | @node Bug Reporting
 | 
|---|
| 5279 | @section How to Report Bugs
 | 
|---|
| 5280 | @cindex bug reports
 | 
|---|
| 5281 | @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
 | 
|---|
| 5282 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5283 | A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
 | 
|---|
| 5284 | products.  If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
 | 
|---|
| 5285 | recommend you contact that organization first.
 | 
|---|
| 5286 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5287 | You can find contact information for many support companies and
 | 
|---|
| 5288 | individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
 | 
|---|
| 5289 | distribution.
 | 
|---|
| 5290 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5291 | Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
 | 
|---|
| 5292 | @samp{bug-binutils@@gnu.org}.
 | 
|---|
| 5293 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5294 | The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
 | 
|---|
| 5295 | @strong{report all the facts}.  If you are not sure whether to state a
 | 
|---|
| 5296 | fact or leave it out, state it!
 | 
|---|
| 5297 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5298 | Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
 | 
|---|
| 5299 | problem and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might
 | 
|---|
| 5300 | assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
 | 
|---|
| 5301 | matter.  Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps
 | 
|---|
| 5302 | the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
 | 
|---|
| 5303 | location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
 | 
|---|
| 5304 | were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
 | 
|---|
| 5305 | into doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and give a
 | 
|---|
| 5306 | specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
 | 
|---|
| 5307 | and the most helpful. 
 | 
|---|
| 5308 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5309 | Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
 | 
|---|
| 5310 | the bug if it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports
 | 
|---|
| 5311 | on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
 | 
|---|
| 5312 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5313 | Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
 | 
|---|
| 5314 | bell?''  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
 | 
|---|
| 5315 | respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
 | 
|---|
| 5316 | You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
 | 
|---|
| 5317 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5318 | To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
 | 
|---|
| 5319 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5320 | @itemize @bullet
 | 
|---|
| 5321 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 5322 | The version of @command{ld}.  @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
 | 
|---|
| 5323 | the @samp{--version} argument.
 | 
|---|
| 5324 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5325 | Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
 | 
|---|
| 5326 | the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
 | 
|---|
| 5327 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5328 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 5329 | Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
 | 
|---|
| 5330 | patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
 | 
|---|
| 5331 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5332 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 5333 | The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
 | 
|---|
| 5334 | version number.
 | 
|---|
| 5335 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5336 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 5337 | What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
 | 
|---|
| 5338 | ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
 | 
|---|
| 5339 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5340 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 5341 | The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
 | 
|---|
| 5342 | observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something important,
 | 
|---|
| 5343 | list them all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
 | 
|---|
| 5344 | sufficient.
 | 
|---|
| 5345 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5346 | If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
 | 
|---|
| 5347 | and then we might not encounter the bug.
 | 
|---|
| 5348 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5349 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 5350 | A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
 | 
|---|
| 5351 | bug.  It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
 | 
|---|
| 5352 | provided that they are reasonably small.  Say no more than 10K.  For
 | 
|---|
| 5353 | bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
 | 
|---|
| 5354 | state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
 | 
|---|
| 5355 | requests them.  (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
 | 
|---|
| 5356 | we do not want to clog it up with large attachments).  But small
 | 
|---|
| 5357 | attachments are best.
 | 
|---|
| 5358 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5359 | If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
 | 
|---|
| 5360 | @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
 | 
|---|
| 5361 | object files.  In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
 | 
|---|
| 5362 | @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files.  Also say
 | 
|---|
| 5363 | how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
 | 
|---|
| 5364 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5365 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 5366 | A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
 | 
|---|
| 5367 | incorrect.  For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
 | 
|---|
| 5368 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5369 | Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
 | 
|---|
| 5370 | will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
 | 
|---|
| 5371 | not notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well not give us
 | 
|---|
| 5372 | a chance to make a mistake.
 | 
|---|
| 5373 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5374 | Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
 | 
|---|
| 5375 | say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
 | 
|---|
| 5376 | copy of @command{ld} is out of synch, or you have encountered a bug in the
 | 
|---|
| 5377 | C library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your copy might crash
 | 
|---|
| 5378 | and ours would not.  If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
 | 
|---|
| 5379 | fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us.  If
 | 
|---|
| 5380 | you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
 | 
|---|
| 5381 | any conclusion from our observations.
 | 
|---|
| 5382 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5383 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 5384 | If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
 | 
|---|
| 5385 | diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
 | 
|---|
| 5386 | @samp{-p} option.  Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
 | 
|---|
| 5387 | If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
 | 
|---|
| 5388 | context, not by line number.
 | 
|---|
| 5389 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5390 | The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
 | 
|---|
| 5391 | sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
 | 
|---|
| 5392 | @end itemize
 | 
|---|
| 5393 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5394 | Here are some things that are not necessary:
 | 
|---|
| 5395 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5396 | @itemize @bullet
 | 
|---|
| 5397 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 5398 | A description of the envelope of the bug.
 | 
|---|
| 5399 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5400 | Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
 | 
|---|
| 5401 | which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
 | 
|---|
| 5402 | changes will not affect it.
 | 
|---|
| 5403 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5404 | This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
 | 
|---|
| 5405 | will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
 | 
|---|
| 5406 | with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
 | 
|---|
| 5407 | We recommend that you save your time for something else.
 | 
|---|
| 5408 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5409 | Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
 | 
|---|
| 5410 | of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
 | 
|---|
| 5411 | output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
 | 
|---|
| 5412 | less time, and so on.
 | 
|---|
| 5413 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5414 | However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
 | 
|---|
| 5415 | report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
 | 
|---|
| 5416 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5417 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 5418 | A patch for the bug.
 | 
|---|
| 5419 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5420 | A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not omit
 | 
|---|
| 5421 | the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
 | 
|---|
| 5422 | a patch is all we need.  We might see problems with your patch and decide
 | 
|---|
| 5423 | to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
 | 
|---|
| 5424 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5425 | Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
 | 
|---|
| 5426 | construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
 | 
|---|
| 5427 | through the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will not be
 | 
|---|
| 5428 | able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
 | 
|---|
| 5429 | fixed.
 | 
|---|
| 5430 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5431 | And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
 | 
|---|
| 5432 | patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A test case will
 | 
|---|
| 5433 | help us to understand.
 | 
|---|
| 5434 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5435 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 5436 | A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
 | 
|---|
| 5437 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5438 | Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about such
 | 
|---|
| 5439 | things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
 | 
|---|
| 5440 | @end itemize
 | 
|---|
| 5441 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5442 | @node MRI
 | 
|---|
| 5443 | @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
 | 
|---|
| 5444 | @cindex MRI compatibility
 | 
|---|
| 5445 | To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
 | 
|---|
| 5446 | linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
 | 
|---|
| 5447 | alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
 | 
|---|
| 5448 | described in @ref{Scripts}.  MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
 | 
|---|
| 5449 | simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
 | 
|---|
| 5450 | @command{ld}.  @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
 | 
|---|
| 5451 | linker commands; these commands are described here.
 | 
|---|
| 5452 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5453 | In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
 | 
|---|
| 5454 | file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
 | 
|---|
| 5455 | features to make use of them.
 | 
|---|
| 5456 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5457 | You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
 | 
|---|
| 5458 | @samp{-c} command-line option.
 | 
|---|
| 5459 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5460 | Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
 | 
|---|
| 5461 | command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
 | 
|---|
| 5462 | blank lines are also allowed for punctuation).  If a line of an
 | 
|---|
| 5463 | MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
 | 
|---|
| 5464 | issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
 | 
|---|
| 5465 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5466 | Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
 | 
|---|
| 5467 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5468 | You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
 | 
|---|
| 5469 | lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
 | 
|---|
| 5470 | The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
 | 
|---|
| 5471 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5472 | @table @code
 | 
|---|
| 5473 | @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
 | 
|---|
| 5474 | @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
 | 
|---|
| 5475 | @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
 | 
|---|
| 5476 | Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
 | 
|---|
| 5477 | the input files.  However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
 | 
|---|
| 5478 | @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
 | 
|---|
| 5479 | your output program.  If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
 | 
|---|
| 5480 | script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
 | 
|---|
| 5481 | commands will appear in the linker output.  You can still use other
 | 
|---|
| 5482 | input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
 | 
|---|
| 5483 | @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
 | 
|---|
| 5484 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5485 | @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
 | 
|---|
| 5486 | @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
 | 
|---|
| 5487 | Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
 | 
|---|
| 5488 | in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
 | 
|---|
| 5489 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5490 | @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
 | 
|---|
| 5491 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5492 | @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
 | 
|---|
| 5493 | @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
 | 
|---|
| 5494 | Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}.  The
 | 
|---|
| 5495 | @var{expression} should be a power of two.
 | 
|---|
| 5496 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5497 | @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
 | 
|---|
| 5498 | @item BASE @var{expression}
 | 
|---|
| 5499 | Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
 | 
|---|
| 5500 | absolute addresses) in the output file.
 | 
|---|
| 5501 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5502 | @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
 | 
|---|
| 5503 | @item CHIP @var{expression}
 | 
|---|
| 5504 | @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
 | 
|---|
| 5505 | This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
 | 
|---|
| 5506 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5507 | @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
 | 
|---|
| 5508 | @item END
 | 
|---|
| 5509 | This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
 | 
|---|
| 5510 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5511 | @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
 | 
|---|
| 5512 | @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
 | 
|---|
| 5513 | Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
 | 
|---|
| 5514 | language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
 | 
|---|
| 5515 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5516 | @enumerate
 | 
|---|
| 5517 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 5518 | S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
 | 
|---|
| 5519 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5520 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 5521 | IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
 | 
|---|
| 5522 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5523 | @item
 | 
|---|
| 5524 | COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
 | 
|---|
| 5525 | @samp{COFF}
 | 
|---|
| 5526 | @end enumerate
 | 
|---|
| 5527 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5528 | @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
 | 
|---|
| 5529 | @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
 | 
|---|
| 5530 | Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
 | 
|---|
| 5531 | @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
 | 
|---|
| 5532 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5533 | The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
 | 
|---|
| 5534 | same line, with no change in its effect.
 | 
|---|
| 5535 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5536 | @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
 | 
|---|
| 5537 | @item LOAD @var{filename}
 | 
|---|
| 5538 | @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
 | 
|---|
| 5539 | Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
 | 
|---|
| 5540 | same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
 | 
|---|
| 5541 | command line.
 | 
|---|
| 5542 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5543 | @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
 | 
|---|
| 5544 | @item NAME @var{output-name}
 | 
|---|
| 5545 | @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
 | 
|---|
| 5546 | MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
 | 
|---|
| 5547 | option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
 | 
|---|
| 5548 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5549 | @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
 | 
|---|
| 5550 | @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
 | 
|---|
| 5551 | @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
 | 
|---|
| 5552 | Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
 | 
|---|
| 5553 | order in which they first appear in the input files.  In an MRI-compatible
 | 
|---|
| 5554 | script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command.  The
 | 
|---|
| 5555 | sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
 | 
|---|
| 5556 | file, in the order specified.
 | 
|---|
| 5557 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5558 | @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
 | 
|---|
| 5559 | @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
 | 
|---|
| 5560 | @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
 | 
|---|
| 5561 | @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
 | 
|---|
| 5562 | Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
 | 
|---|
| 5563 | @var{name} used in the linker input files.
 | 
|---|
| 5564 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5565 | @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
 | 
|---|
| 5566 | @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
 | 
|---|
| 5567 | @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
 | 
|---|
| 5568 | @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
 | 
|---|
| 5569 | You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
 | 
|---|
| 5570 | specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
 | 
|---|
| 5571 | If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
 | 
|---|
| 5572 | @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
 | 
|---|
| 5573 | @end table
 | 
|---|
| 5574 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5575 | @include fdl.texi
 | 
|---|
| 5576 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5577 | @node Index
 | 
|---|
| 5578 | @unnumbered Index
 | 
|---|
| 5579 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5580 | @printindex cp
 | 
|---|
| 5581 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5582 | @tex
 | 
|---|
| 5583 | % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo.  In the
 | 
|---|
| 5584 | % meantime:
 | 
|---|
| 5585 | \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
 | 
|---|
| 5586 | \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
 | 
|---|
| 5587 | \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
 | 
|---|
| 5588 | \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
 | 
|---|
| 5589 | \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
 | 
|---|
| 5590 | \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
 | 
|---|
| 5591 | \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
 | 
|---|
| 5592 | \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
 | 
|---|
| 5593 | \page\colophon
 | 
|---|
| 5594 | % Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
 | 
|---|
| 5595 | @end tex
 | 
|---|
| 5596 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5597 | 
 | 
|---|
| 5598 | @contents
 | 
|---|
| 5599 | @bye
 | 
|---|